gold club casino manual
DESCRIPTION
Gold Club Casino Roulette Service ManualTRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
BiOS SETUP
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 2: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENTS 1.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE GAMING MACHINE SYSTEM................................................ 3
2.0 ACCESS TO THE GAME OR TO THE BIOS SOFTWARE TOOL................................. 4
3.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE BIOS SOFTWARE TOOL ......................................................... 5 3.1 DESCRIPTION OF INDIVIDUAL MENUS......................................................................................... 7
3.1.1 CONFIG MENU ............................................................................................................................... 7 3.1.2 BACKUP MENU ............................................................................................................................. 55 3.1.3 RESTORE MENU........................................................................................................................... 62 3.1.4 USERS MENU ................................................................................................................................ 65 3.1.5 DIAG MENU ................................................................................................................................... 74 3.1.6 SYSTEM INFO ............................................................................................................................... 99
![Page 3: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE GAMING MACHINE SYSTEM As we know, the main part of the gaming device (Automated American Roulette) is a computer, which enables the performance of all major processes, such as all kinds of control over the game of roulette, security control, accounting of payments, etc. The automatic roulette is a highly complex gaming device, therefore all the processes that are performed require an adequate security level. In other words that means that the operator or anyone else do not have access to the windows environment. In our case this environment is windows embedded. In addition to the protection itself, regarding the access to the working environment, some files that are very important for the roulette operation will be protected by the WIBU key, which means that it will be impossible to modify the files related to the WIBU key. Access to the individual parts is shown in the figure below.
Figure 1: Presentation of user access to the individual environments
As seen in the figure above, the user has access only to the BiOS software tool and to the roulette game, which will be carried out automatically when the gaming device is turned on. The user will not have access to all other programs and to the windows environment. How can you leave the roulette game and entry to BiOS setup window? If you want to do this you must first stop the roulette and after that you must restart it again. Now you have 15s for decide what do you want. So if you want to enter to BiOS window you just press »RELOAD« button.
![Page 4: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.0 ACCESS TO THE GAME OR TO THE BIOS SOFTWARE TOOL As was mentioned in the previous chapter, the roulette game program (ruleta.exe) starts automatically when turning on the gaming device. For a potential access to the BiOS software tool, the user has to do it in 15 seconds after turning on the gaming device. That means that if no action is taken within 15 seconds, the computer will automatically start the game. A detailed description is given below. When turning on the machine, the user has the following four options:
No action is taken and the game program will start automatically.
Press the »RELOAD« key within 15 seconds in order to access BiOS. In order to access BiOS, a correct username and password have to be entered.
Press the »MENU« key within 15 seconds in order to start the game program before it starts automatically.
Press the »NEIGHBOURS« key within 15 seconds (see Figure 3) and the computer will switch to the stand-by mode.
To switch from the stand-by mode to any other mode press one of the above-mentioned keys, which are keys on the gaming device keyboard and not on the computer keyboard.
![Page 5: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
3.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE BiOS SOFTWARE TOOL In order to access the BiOS software tool, press the RELOAD key when turning on the gaming device. A login screen will open, requiring you to enter the username and password. After having entered the correct username and password and clicking the »OK« button, BiOS is ready for use.
Figure 2: GC commander software tool
As seen in Figure 2 above, BiOS consists of several menus and submenus. As has been mentioned previously, the operator can only move through the individual menus by using the gaming device keyboard, i.e. the one at the first gaming position, which is supposed to simulate the computer keyboard. The figure below shows the position of the functional keys on the keyboard.
![Page 6: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Figure 3: Presentation of the position of functional keys on the keyboard
Presentation of the figure above can be carried out in the BiOS software tool by clicking the menu key. The figure shows the meaning of the individual keys of the gaming device keyboard. The keys that are most frequently used are:
These keys are used to move »up« and »down«
These keys are used to move »left« and »right«
The upper (2to1) key is used as »backspace« and the central (2to1) key is used as »enter«.
Neighbours key is used as »escape« Zero Spiel key is used as »tab«
![Page 7: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
3.1 DESCRIPTION OF INDIVIDUAL MENUS
3.1.1 CONFIG MENU
This menu contains all basic software tools that are used for the roulette as a gaming device, in addition to the ruleta.exe. These are mainly the programs that are used to adjust certain settings of the roulette.
By clicking on this button the setup window is opened. Here are all settings which were been before in stop dialog setup window.
By clicking on the selected button, a software tool for set the touchscreen drivers is started. By clicking the selected button, a software tool is started in which the privileges of the smart keys are set.
By clicking the selected button, a software tool is started in which the mechanical counter settings are adjusted.
By clicking the selected button, a software tool starts in which the wavecom modem configuration is set.
By clicking the selected button, a window opens in which you enter the text that you want and that will later be shown in the roulette game.
By clicking the selected button, a set-up window opens in which the level of log file recording is set.
By clicking the selected button, a dialog box opens in which the auto backup function is set, which is used for the automatic data backup. By clicking the selected button, a set-up window opens, in which configuration of the individual communication ports is set. By clicking the selected button, a set-up window opens, in which the communication port configuration is set.
![Page 8: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
By clicking the selected button, certain repair services are started.
By clicking this button, the gaming device is turned off. By clicking this button, the gaming device will be restarted.
By clicking this button, the BiOS software tool is closed.
![Page 9: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
GAME SETUP Game setup is a software tool with which values of individual settings can be defined or chosen. The tool has been designed so that each user has access to only defined levels, meaning that the quantity of settings is limited to each individual type of user (see figure below).
Display of access options by individual type of user
As seen in the figure above, users not belonging in the above groups do not have access to the settings. The highest level in the structure is admin. Only this user has access to and may modify all settings. Game Setup or, respectively, the software tool, with whose aid the operator adjusts the gaming device for a wider selection of players, is very user-friendly. It is designed so that individual categories are broken down into categories whose names alone direct users to the desired settings. An example is shown below.
![Page 10: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
Game setup window
As seen in the figure above, individual settings are broken down into four categories, namely:
- game settings (settings influencing the game) - hardware settings (configuration hardware sections) - menu access (configuration menus of the gaming device) - other settings (additional settings)
For access to individual settings, the operator has a choice of two different methods:
- the program automatically directs the user to the desired settings by clicking on a selection, or
- with the aid of a tree structure. Both methods of access are shown below.
![Page 11: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
method 1 method 2 Description of individual settings
GAME SETTINGS additional
ball read action after ball two soon detected
By clicking on the chosen setting, you can define how the gaming device will react if the ball drops on a number too quickly. The setting is defined by selecting the desired option from the drop-down menu.
Three different options are available:
![Page 12: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
- clear-all (cancels the current game) - normal (no influence: the game commences normally) - clear-after-blow (cancels bets placed after the ball is ejected)
Changes to settings are confirmed by clicking on the »update« button.
max time diff This setting enables you to define the deviation (in percentages) between the time of the last game and the average time. This is a type of security mechanism preventing balls from being dropped while the gaming device is in operation.
The number 0.30, which in terms of percentage is 30%, is used as the default setting. If the differences in times are large, the gaming device will detect this and stop the game (ERROR 65 is displayed). This changed setting is also confirmed by clicking on the »update« button.
sensor type This setting is used to simulate defined sections of the gaming device, namely: simulation of the sensor, MB, keyboard foils, etc. The setting is selected from the drop-down list and is confirmed by clicking on the »update« button.
![Page 13: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 13
As seen in the figure above, four values can currently be selected, which are:
- sim-sensor (simulation of the sensor) - server-connection (flying roulette) - normal (normal roulette operation) - sim-all (complete simulation: sensor, MB, membrane keys)
During normal operation of the gaming device, this setting must be set to »normal«.
times two read ball This setting is used to define the minimum number of spins readings of the ball. This means that the ball must be on the same number at least twice or more when reading from the same number. The value 3 is used as the default setting.
![Page 14: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 14
bonus slot
param This setting is not used.
type This setting is used to define bonus games in which this option must be present. Currently, there are two bonus games available, namely spanish, which is used on gaming devices on Spanish markets, and cbslot, used in Belgium.
![Page 15: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 15
If bonus games are not required, »none« should be selected.
RNG blow out
This setting is used for defining additional speeds for dropping/ejecting the balls. The basic speed of drop is between 20 and 43, but can be additionally increased by 20. Example: setting 0: speed of drop between 20 and 43 setting 10; speed of drop between 20 and (43+10), which actually means the speed is between 20 and 53 Setting is not avaliable for devices with GLI approved.
is logging This setting is used to create additional data logs (GLI requirement). Here the following information:
- speed of ball drops - speed of wheel spin - position of the wheel when balls are dropped
is listed for each game separately.
If you wish to modify any information, the option enabled/true must be selected in the settings window. The changed setting is confirmed by clicking on the »update« button.
![Page 16: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 16
win calculating win limit
all boards board 01 board 02
......
...... board 10
This setting is used to limit the maximum win on gaming devices. The owner of the device can, in addition to limiting bets on individual game fields, also limit the maximum win in the current game. The values can be set for each gaming position separately (board 1 to board 10) or by clicking on all boards, which will limit the win at all gaming positions simultaneously.
The value defining the maximum win is denoted in credits and not in monetary value. The monetary value is derived by dividing the value by the number of credits using the setting money to credit conversion (game settings).
win limit run time enable
This setting allows an on-line calculation of the maximum win with regard to the current bet. At the moment, this setting is only used on roulettes utilising the Spanish bonus game.
![Page 17: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 17
special type
This setting enables you to define the calculation of wins on gaming devices. There are currently five modes of calculation available, namely:
- none: the win is calculated according to the principle 1/36 (normal roulette), - nasser: the win is calculated according to the principle 1/35. - German tipping: a calculation whereby for bets on three and caval, one credit is
removed for each 36 credits won, - spanish-old: a calculation according to the old Spanish method, and - english: for bets on simple fields where drops on zero fields return half of the
winnings to the player.
ctrl alt del disabled This setting is used for turning on or turning off the task manager software tool. This should only be used if any of the open software tools freeze. If you wish to use this function, the option enabled/true in the settings window should be chosen. The option is confirmed by clicking on the »update« button.
![Page 18: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 18
jackpot This setting enables or disables the use of the jackpot function on the gaming device. By clicking on the chosen setting, a window opens on which the type of jackpot is selected.
As seen in the above settings window, the operator may choose from three different options:
![Page 19: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 19
- progressive-jackpot (allows a progressive jackpot to be set in which the value of the win is shown for each gaming position separately),
- progressive-jackpot-display-tcp (is identical to the previous setting, except that the win is additionally shown on the external display; gaming device and jackpot display are connected to each other via a network cable), and
- progressive-jackpot-display (external display and gaming device are connected to each other via a multiplexer).
The selected setting is confirmed by clicking on the »update« button.
logic The setting is in use.
number of player stations This setting is used for defining the number of gaming stations (positions) at the gaming device. Currently, the following settings are used: 5 − for gaming devices with five gaming positions (STAR) 6 − for gaming devices with six gaming positions (SX) 8 − for gaming devices with eight gaming positions (UFO or OMEGA) 10 − for gaming devices with ten gaming positions (GALAXY)
previous bet This setting enables the automatic placing of bets from previous games. You can select between two different types, namely:
- yes (where the bets placed in the previous game are repeated) - only winning numbers (where only those bets won in the previous game are
repeated) - no (disables the function)
A display of how both above functions work is shown below.
![Page 20: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 20
current game following game The two figures above display repeated bets in the following game if the option yes is chosen (bets are repeated in all cases), whereas the two figures below show only winning bets repeated.
current game following game
repeat This setting enables you to configure the »repeat«, »double« and »delete« buttons. The functions of the buttons are defined in the settings window shown below.
![Page 21: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 21
A description and explanation of the individual settings follows:
- double (by checking this function, bets are doubled) - repeat (by checking this function, bets from the previous game are repeated) - delete-last (allows bets to be erased with one click; the last bet is erased and with a
subsequent click all placed bets are erased) - delete-history (allows the erasing of bets in the consecutive order they were placed;
the first click erases the last bet placed, the next click erases the second-to-last bet placed, etc.)
- delete-select (allows the erasing of bets by the player; the player may erase any bet he/she wishes)
responding COM time
This setting defines the minimum time period in which a reply to transmitted information will still be correctly accepted or sent. This setting is only used with COM 2. The value 140ms is the factory setting (used as the default setting) and should not be changed.
spins before eating This setting allows you to define how many spins after the droped number is read will the ball remain on the wheel. Two settings are currently used, namely:
- default - hitachi-inverter
![Page 22: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 22
Under the default setting, the gaming device will immediately remove the ball when it drops into a number, whereas the hitachi-inverter setting will allow the ball to stay on the wheel for one spin longer. The settings are not actually dependent on the choice of frequency transformers, but if a hitachi-frequency device is installed on the gaming device, the hitachi-inverter option must be selected.
chips value
chip 01 chip 02 ..... ..... chip 07
This setting is used for defining values for individual tokens or chips. Seven types of values are available. First, the number of chips must be selected (number). Next, their values are defined. An example of defining individual chips: Example for x1, x10 and FULL: Under the setting (number), enter the value 3, whereby the values of the first three chips are defined.
![Page 23: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 23
Display of chip values on the roulette:
Example for x1, x10, x50, x100, x250 and x500: This setting is very similar to the previous one, except that in this case, six chips instead of three have been selected.
Display of chip values on the roulette:
![Page 24: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 24
languages sound
language This setting allows you to define the language in which sound files are transmitted. The language is defined by selecting the appropriate group from the drop-down list and confirming the selection by clicking on the »update« button.
stereo mono This setting allows you to choose between stereo or mono sound. To see if the desired languages are available in stereo or mono formats, first check with the manufacturer.
text language all boards board 01 board 02 .... .... board 10
This setting allows you to select the language in which text files are displayed. These are files available to all players. You can select between a group setting (all boards) or settings for each gaming position separately. We recommend that the default text language be set at all gaming positions separately. In this case as well, a variety of language options are available.
![Page 25: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 25
The figure below shows an example of a text display on the gaming device.
layouts all boards board 01 board 02 .... .... board 10
This setting defines the type of layout displayed when the gaming device is first turned on. Layouts can be defined for each gaming position separately, meaning that each gaming position can have its own layout or the same layout can be selected for all the gaming positions. In the latter case, the layout at all gaming positions will be identical. The setting is defined by selecting the desired layout in the settings window.
![Page 26: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 26
Four layouts are currently available, namely:
- defaulty - touchscreen - touchscreenblue - spanish2future
The layout is defined by entering one of the abovementioned options and confirming the selection by clicking on the »update« button. The four layouts are shown below.
defaulty layout touchscreen layout
touchscreenblue layout spanish2future layout
![Page 27: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 27
pay system user payout
max This setting is used to define the maximum payout that can be paid to the player via the hopper or ticket printer. This is done by clicking the »payout« button in the menu and selecting the desired amount of payout. The entered value is in credits and is not a monetary value.
handpay limit This setting enables you to define the extent of handpay payouts. If the player wishes to have a win paid out that is higher than the set limit, this amount will be paid out via handpay and not via the hopper or the ticket printer.
no output fractions This setting is used to disable partial payouts, namely via:
- hopper, - ticket printer, - smart key, - etc.
If you wish to disable partial payout via any payment device, select this option in the settings window and confirm by clicking on the »update« button.
![Page 28: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 28
The figure above shows how to disable partial payouts via handpay and the ticket printer. Partial payouts are enabled for the remaining payment devices. What is a partial payout? A partial payout is only a portion of the win paid out to the player.
output type This setting defines the privileges assigned to the smart key. Three values are available, namely:
- in - handpay - out
If the in option is chosen, money can be paid in; the out option allows payouts; and the handpay option confirms payouts via the on-line system.
per board limits all boards
max 1_01 1_02 ... 1_36 board
min 1_01
![Page 29: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 29
1_02 ... 1_36
This setting defines the maximum and minimum limits for bets. These values can be set for each gaming position separately (board1 – board10) or for all gaming positions (all boards): - 1_01: minimum and maximum bet on one number (STRAIGHT UP) - 1_02: minimum and maximum bet on two numbers (SPLIT) - 1_03: minimum and maximum bet on three numbers (TRIO) - 1_04: minimum and maximum bet on four numbers (CORNER) - 1_06: minimum and maximum bet on six numbers (LINE) - 1_12: minimum and maximum bet on twelve numbers (DOZEN or COLUMN) - 1_36: minimum and maximum bet on eighteen numbers (LOW, HIGH, ODD, EVEN) Under the column max board, the maximum number of bets that can be placed can be defined (in credits) on the game wheel per individual game.
max tokens This setting enables you to define the maximum number of placed chips in any one game. This means the number of different fields a player can place bets on in any one game.
The figure above shows a limited number of chips or tokens placed (20) in the current game.
timing screensaver
active This setting is used for activating the screensaver. The gaming device goes into screensaver mode when no credits remain at the gaming position.
![Page 30: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 30
number of spins to activate This setting is used to define the number of spins (games) until the screensaver mode is switched on. If we take, as an example, 2 spins, the gaming position will revert to screensaver mode after two games from the moment the number of credits equals zero.
time This setting is used to define the time interval for ejecting balls when the gaming device is in screensaver mode. This means that in this case, the device will eject a ball every 100 seconds if the value is set to 100.
bets time This is the amount of time in seconds between the start of a game and the ejection of the ball.
no more bets time This is the amount of time in seconds between the ejection of the ball and the closing of bets.
still time This is the amount of time in seconds between the last button hit and the ejection of the ball. Individual time intervals are shown in the figure below.
tokens value
token 01 token 02 ... token 07
![Page 31: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 31
This setting is used to define the limits for individual tokens (chips). The limit is represented by a colour scale for individual tokens. How are individual limits set? Lets take the combination x1, x10 and FULL as an example. Under the setting tokens-number, enter the value 3; then, under the setting tokens-value, enter the following individual values: token 01: enter 9 token 02: enter 99 or the limit at which the token will change to the following colour (as desired) token 03: enter 500 (this is the maximum limit and is equal to the maximum bet) The figure below displays the changing of token colours.
Let's take as another example the combination x2, x4, x10, x50, x100, x250 and x500 using seven tokens. Under the setting tokens-number, enter the value 7; then, under individual limit values: token 01: enter 2 token 02: enter 8 token 03: enter 48 token 04: enter 98 token 05: enter 248 token 06: enter 498 token 07: enter 1000 (this is the maximum limit and is equal to the maximum bet)
number This setting is used to define the number of individual tokens. The number is equal to the number entered under the setting chips-number.
win counting active
all boards
![Page 32: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 32
board 01 board 02 .... .... board 10
This setting is used to define the type of transfer of winnings. If the option is enabled, the win will not be transferred in one amount, but gradually. In reality, the transfer of winnings is a simulation of counting by mechanical counters. The setting can be defined for all gaming positions as a whole, or separately for each gaming position.
The principle of transferring wins when the option is enabled is shown below.
The figure above shows how winnings are gradually transferred into credits.
bet type This setting defines or, respectively, allows you to set the type of bet. Three types are possible, namely:
![Page 33: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 33
- credits - chips - spanish chips
Currently only the two settings credits and spanish chips are used. What is the difference? The difference between credits and spanish chips is that in the case of spanish chips, the player may only bet precisely defined values regarding bets dependent on the setting (2, 4, 10, 50, 100, 250, 500). Thus, bets such as 8, 52, etc. may not be placed. If, on the other hand, the credits option is selected, all bet values can be placed regardless of the setting (1, 2, 20, 22, 142, etc.).
money to credit conversion This setting enables you to define the relationship between monetary value and credits. If you wish 1€ to equal 10 credits, the value 10 is entered. This setting only refers to bonus games, which must be played prior to the roulette game (valid in Spain).
![Page 34: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 34
HARDWARE SETTINGS additional
foil type
This setting allows you to define the types of foil for keyboards. Two types of foil are available: foil with a series circuit, and foil without a series circuit. The type of foil is defined by simply choosing the desired option in the settings window and clicking on the »update« button to confirm the choice.
The figures below display both foil options.
foil without a series circuit foil with a series circuit
![Page 35: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 35
keyboard panel leds type
Using the settings window, the type of control keys used by the gaming device for lamination of the foils of keyboards or the foils of BET keys are chosen and confirmed by clicking on the »update« button.
- serial-keyboard: allows you to turn on the lights on BET keys when bets are open (this
setting is only possible if serial circuit keyboards are used) - spanish: allows the use of luminous keyboards - none: luminous foil keyboard or, respectively, serial circuit keyboard is not in use;
ordinary foil is used
ordinary non-luminous foil (none or serial keybd.) luminous foil (spanish)
version The choice of setting allows you to define the version of keyboard circuit. This circuit is used to control the bill acceptor, hopper, coin acceptor, etc. Description of individual settings:
![Page 36: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 36
- normal: serial keyboard version - one-character-command: serial circuit version ???? (all pulse circuits) - two-character-command: all keyboards version 1.4.0 and serial circuits
wheel This setting enables you to select the type of roulette wheel used. A variety of types are available: roulette wheels with single zero, double zero, etc. The type of roulette wheel is defined by selecting the wheel type and its position in the settings window. Confirm the selection by clicking on the »update« button.
Description of individual settings: normal: normal wheel with 36 numbers and one zero numbers26: wheel with 26 numbers, one zero and an X double-zero: wheel with 36 numbers and one or two zeros (currently not in use) double-zero-with-series: normal wheel with double zeros and foil, with the option of using a series
bill A
active code credit nominal string
B
![Page 37: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 37
.... .... H serial bill
active By using the above-displayed settings, you can define the settings for individual banknotes. The gaming device can accept up to eight different banknote denominations (A-H) by which each banknote must be described separately. Each banknote is first given a status (active) and then a code (code), the number of credits (credit) and a name (string). These four parameters are used to describe individual banknotes. Description of individual parameters:
- active (enables the activation of an individual banknote; prior to entering the remaining parameters, this field should be set to 1 and the game set up once again)
- code (the code of the banknote that is obtained with the aid of the GC terminal; when the bank note is inserted, the reader returns a certain code (205) − the value is then entered into the field)
- credit (number of credits per individual banknote is entered here, as desired) - nominal (the face value of the banknote is entered, which is, in reality, the actual value
of the banknote) - string (ml_bills_A is entered for the first bank note, ml_bills_B for the second bank
note, etc.) Serial bill: If the gaming device uses a bill acceptor that utilises serial communication, this option must be activated. This is done by selecting the value true under the settings for active. Again, each banknote must be described using the aforementioned parameters.
coin A
active code credit nominal string
B ... ... E
![Page 38: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 38
Similarly to banknotes, the same applies to coins. The gaming device can accept up to five varieties of coins (A-E) in which each coin must be described according to the already mentioned parameters. The meaning of parameters in this case is completely identical to those of banknotes. Description of parameters: See the parameter values valid for banknotes. The only difference is that under the parameter strings for coins, the following strings must be used: ml_coinsA, ml_coinsB, etc.
destination This setting enables you to denote the path of coins when accepted. Three options are available, namely:
- coin to dropbox (coins are directed into the dropbox upon acceptance) - coin to hopper (coins are directed into the hopper upon acceptance) - combination of both (coins are directed into the hopper upon acceptance and, when
full, redirected to the dropbox)
drop max This setting is used to define the maximum number of accepted coins in the dropbox.
hopper mask This setting is used to define the masks for the hopper and dropbox. This is the only way of letting the gaming device know precisely which method to use for directing coins into the hopper or dropbox. Description of individual masks: • hopper-hw-min: The gaming device will consider the minimum hardware limit of the hopper. When the level of coins is lower than the limit, it will notify the owner or manager of the gaming device of this (traffic flow) that the hopper in the designated gaming position will shortly be empty. • hopper-hw-maxmin: The gaming device will consider the minimum and maximum hardware limits of the hopper. If the level of coins is higher than the allowed limit, the gaming device will automatically disable the continued acceptance of coins. • hopper-sw-maxmin: The gaming device will consider the minimum and maximum software limits of the hopper. When the number of coins is less than the minimum limit, the gaming device will disable
![Page 39: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 39
further payouts. On the other hand, if the number of coins exceeds the maximum limit, the further acceptance of coins will be disabled. The minimum and maximum number of coins is defined using the settings hopper max and hopper min. • hopper-sw-max: The gaming device will only consider the upper software limit. • hopper-sw-min: The gaming device will only consider the lower software limit. • hopperdrop-hhwdsw-hmaxdmax: In addition to the upper hardware limit of the hopper, the gaming device will also consider the upper software limit of the dropbox. If the level of coins in the hopper exceeds the allowed limit, further coins will be redirected into the dropbox. When the number of coins in the dropbox reaches the maximum limit (drop max), the further acceptance of coins will be disabled. • none-none-none: The gaming device will not consider any of the aforementioned masks. • hopperdrop-sw-max: The gaming device will consider both the software limit of the hopper and the software limit of the dropbox. When both maximum limits are reached (number of coins in hopper = hopper max and number of coins in dropbox = drop max), the further acceptance of coins will be disabled. • hopperdrop-sw-hmindmax: • hopperdrop-hhwdsw-halldmax: The gaming device will consider the minimum and maximum hardware limit of the hopper and the maximum software limit of the dropbox. • drop-sw-max: This mask is displayed on gaming devices where only a dropbox is installed. If this becomes full (number of coins = maximum number of coins), the further acceptance of coins will be disabled. • hopper-hw-max: The gaming device only considers the upper hardware limit of the hopper. If full, the further acceptance of coins will be disabled. • hopperdrop-sw-maxmin:
hopper max This setting is used to define the maximum number of coins in the hopper.
hopper min This setting is used to define the minimum number of coins in the hopper.
reset on timeout
![Page 40: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 40
When this setting is active, the number of coins in the case of a hopper reset will automatically be set to 0. If inactive, the setting will not change.
dallas code for other dallas codes type
This setting is used to define the manner of use of smart keys if used for payout. This can be used in two ways, namely: - by croupier - by currency What is the difference? If a smart key is used by croupier, all keys are identical. On the other hand, if the key is used by currency, the owner of the key may select the payout in either foreign or domestic currency. This setting is no longer used. Additionally, the type of key that will be used must be entered.
gsm alarm limit
This setting enables you to define payout limit values or payouts for which we wish to be informed via an SMS message. This means that the gaming device, in the event of a payout or a payout larger than the set limit, will send an SMS message.
com port This setting allows you to select the communication portal to which a mobile phone or WAVECOM modem will be connected.
online master
type This setting is used to define or, respectively, select the type of master on-line system that will be used. This is done by selecting the desired value in the settings window and clicking on the »update« button to confirm the choice.
![Page 41: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 41
slave type
This setting is identical to the setting for master on-line. This option is chosen if the master variant is already in use.
custom setting This setting enables you to define data that will be transmitted via the on-line system. The following can be selected:
- data (gaming device only transmits data on games) - error only (gaming device only transmits data on faults in the device) - all (gaming device transmits all data)
peripheral
devices By selecting an option, the choice of peripheral devices still used and connected to the gaming machine is defined. The on-line systems MOBILE, WAVECOM, etc. fall under this category. The values are easily defined by selecting the peripheral device that is used.
switches switch 01 switch 02 .... .... switch 08
![Page 42: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 42
This setting is used to define the reaction of the gaming device upon the activation of any security switch. Three settings are possible, namely:
- err31 (upon activation of a switch, the gaming machine will stop; a reboot is possible with the aid of a smart key)
- err31 with code activation (upon activation of a switch, the gaming machine will stop; a reboot is only possible by the manufacturer using an activation code)
- write to log (upon activation of a switch, the gaming machine will not stop; the activation will be recorded in a log file)
Positions of individual switches on the gaming device: switch 01 Gaming positions 7−8 switch 02 Gaming positions 5−6 switch 03 Gaming positions 3−4 switch 04 Gaming positions 1−2 switch 05 Cupola switch 06 Cash box and bill box (all cash boxes of the gaming device are connected to one switch) switch 07 Anti-lift switch switch 08 Not active
ticket type
tito driver name
board 01 board 02 ... ... board 10
![Page 43: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 43
This setting is used to define the name or address of the ticket printer driver at individual gaming positions. As names are not discretionary, names are defined according to the following rule: The name used at the first gaming position (board 01) is entered as »tito0«, followed by »tito1« for board 02, »tito2« for board 03, etc.
active This setting is used to activate the ticket printer.
ticket name This setting is used to define the name or type of ticket printer. The name is defined by the manufacturer and should not be changed.
ups active
This setting enables you to activate smart UPS. In case of a power shutoff, if the gaming device is active, it will change over to battery power. The device constantly monitors the status, and if lower than the allowed limit, the gaming device will turn off by itself. If this setting is not activated, the gaming device will turn off automatically upon a power shutoff.
currency This setting is used to define the currency of payment, meaning that data on payouts will be automatically displayed in the selected currency value.
![Page 44: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 44
MENU ACCESS allowed games
allowe 1 code maxboardbet
allowe 2 allowe 3
This setting enables the activation of the function of raising bets. The setting is used for raising bets during a game without stopping the gaming device. There are three levels of raising bets available. All that is necessary is the definition of the code of the keys used to raise bets and their subsequent values. Key codes are obtained from the manufacturer.
dallas min pay in code value
This setting is used to define the minimum payout for a specific key. The consecutive number of the key is used as the code.
password admin supervisor user
This setting allows you to replace or change individual passwords. These are used to access individual financial data, statistics, etc. The password is entered using the keyboard of the gaming device by pressing the desired combination of keys.
fast financial type This setting is used to define the type of financial overview displayed. This information is accessible with the aid of a smart key. An example is shown in the figure below.
![Page 45: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 45
mask
The mask is used to define access privileges by individual program functions. Two types of levels regarding privileges are currently used on the gaming device: a higher level and a lower level. The higher level is defined using the mentioned settings, whereas the lower level is defined via the privilege editor.
other setting only once
This setting is used to define the event that will occur upon the first start-up of the gaming device. This only occurs once and never again. It is used to reset the gaming device (all values default to zero). TOUCHSCREEN With clicking on the seletcted button the program tool for set the touchscreen monitors is open. If some more explanations are needed please contact Gold Club technical department or check on the Internet on the follow URL: http://www.3m.com/3MTouchSystems/downloads/PDFs/MT7-XP2K-UG.pdf
![Page 46: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 46
PRIVILEGE EDITOR With this software tool, all the necessary privileges of the smart keys are determined. Detailed description and use of this software tool can be found in the PRIVILEGE EDITOR SOFTWARE TOOL document. MECHANICAL COUNTERS By clicking the selected button, a set-up window will open, in which all of the required mechanical counter parameters are set. A more accurate description of the set-up window can be found in the MECHANICAL METERS SETUP document. GSM REPORTS By clicking the selected button, a set-up window opens, in which the individual settings of the wavecom device are determined. This device is used to send an SMS on the roulette condition to its owner. A more accurate description and use of the software tool can be found in the WAVECOM SYSTEM document. RULETA STRING By clicking the related button, a dialog box will open in which you enter the text that will later be shown in the game. The figure below shows an example of text display in the right down corner of the display.
![Page 47: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 47
Figure 4: Example of a text sequence display
LOGGER By clicking the selected button, the »logger config« software tool will start. Only by using this software tool, can the data level that will be recorded in the log file beset on the machine.
![Page 48: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 48
Figure 5: Presentation of »loger config« set-up window
As seen from the figure above, the »log config« enables you to set a minimum level of data recording. You can choose among seven different levels between the lowest INFO and the highest DEBG. A setting is selected by pressing the red/black key first, to select the minimum level and then pressing enter (key 2to1). After that, select the desired level (red/black key) and press enter (key 2to1) again. After selecting the desired level, the focus has to be shifted again, which is done by the key (zero spiel). The window is closed by clicking the »neighbours« key. AUTOBACKUP By clicking the autobackup key, a set-up window opens, which is used to set automatic backup of certain gaming device data. As seen in the figure below, a gaming device can automatically backup the following four different types of data:
- statistics - finances - game settings - operator data (username, password, privileges)
![Page 49: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 49
Figure 6: Autobackup set-up window
In addition to the data selection, the autobackup interval has to be selected as well. It can be set anywhere between 5 and 300s. A 5s interval means that the machine will backup the selected data every 5 seconds. Another thing that has to be determined here is to which locationthe data should backup data. You do that by setting up a _backup file, which you create yourself, on a selected disk (flash disk or USB stick). SERIAL PORT CONFIG By clicking the selected button, a configuration box opens in which the speed of the data transfer of the individual communication ports is set. The figure below shows an example of a configuration box.
![Page 50: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 50
Figure 7: Serial port configuration box
As mentioned above, this software tool is used to set the data transfer speed of the individual communication ports, either those on the computer or those on the multiplexer. Description of individual parts of the configuration box
In the first selection choose the communication port. The program offers two options to select from: --avail-- and --file--. --avail--: contains all existing communication ports, i.e. all operating communication ports. --file--: contains all communication ports, but they are not necessarily all active. Therefore the user has to always select among the –avail—communication ports.
![Page 51: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 51
In the second selection, the data transfer for the individual communication ports (com port) is selected. There are seven different speeds available to choose from. At the moment, there are only two different speeds used on the gaming machine: 9600kbit/s (this speed is selected if the connected device is either the gaming machine keyboard or the mainboard) 115200kbit/s (this speed is selected if the connected device is a multiplexer via COM port) or 921600kbit/s (if the connected device is a multiplexer via USB)
By means of the »ADD«, »REMOVE« and »SAVE« buttons, you can add, delete or save individual settings.
How to set the speed of the individual communication ports Example.: You want to connect the first gaming spot of the device on the COM PORT no. 5. In the first part (section --file--) select number 5. The keyboard, as we know, requires a transfer speed of 9600kbit/s, therefore select 9600 in the second part and click ADD.
Option is used if you want to remove the device from one com port to another. More instructions are writeing below.
How to remap the actual com port? This option is used when replacing the multiplexer (hereinafter: the device). In some cases, the gaming machine might fail to assign the preliminary settings to the device (assigning them to another COM port). The gaming machine will not register the changes upon start-up, thus generating an error. With the aid of the REMAP button in the SerialComConfig configuration window, we can open a screen in which the configuration of the connected device can be changed.
![Page 52: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 52
Figure 8: Port remapping configuration box
First, the port that we want to change or rename must be selected. Then, click the Remap button. In the window that appears (figure below), enter the appropriate COM port and confirm by clicking OK.
Close the Port map window by clicking OK. Warning: The new settings will become valid only after restarting the gaming machine. KEYBOARD PORT MAPPING By clicking the selected button, the »port mapping« configuration box opens, which is shown in the figure below. By means of this software tool, the hardware configuration of the gaming device is set. That means that we determine which device will be connected to the individual communication port.
![Page 53: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 53
Figure 9: Port mapping configuration box
The configuration box consists of two parts, as it is seen in the figure above. In the first (left) part the type of the device is selected, which is transferred to the second (right) part by clicking the button ADD. The device at the right side of the box is initialised and ready to use. Description of the individual selection boxes:
Selection of device that you want to connect. At the moment you can choose among three devices: the gaming device keyboard, a GSM modem or a ticket printer.
Selection of the consecutive number of the device. When selecting it, it has to begin with 1 for the keyboards. The selection is not important for other devices.
Selection of the communication port. We can select between two kinds of ports: com port computer and multiplexer. If you select the port 30301 that means that the keyboard is connected to the other multiplexer port.
![Page 54: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 54
What does the number 30301 mean? 3 03 01 – the first number is fixed and does not change 3 03 01 – the number of the computer communication port to which a multiplexer or the gaming device point is connected 3 03 01 – consecutive number of the multiplexer communication port By means of the additional keys:
- ADD - REMOVE - SAVE
new settings can be added, deleted or saved. SERVICE CONTROL SYSTEM SHUTDOWN Use this key to turn off the gaming machine. SYSTEM RESTART Use this key to restart the gaming device. QUIT By pressing this key, the software tool BiOS closes and the roulette game program starts automatically.
![Page 55: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 55
3.1.2 BACKUP MENU
Backup menu enables you to do various data backup. Here you can save certain data (finances, setup, statistics, log files, etc.) to the USB flash disk.
PC OF GAMING MACHINE USB FLASH DISC
BACKUP TO
Figure 10: Backup operation presentation
The picture above shows the principle of saving the data. Description and presentation of the individual backup menu functions.
By clicking the selected button, the program will automatically erase the contents of certain files on the USB unit.
By clicking the selected button, the program will save the user data on the USB disk.
By clicking the selected button, all gaming device settings will be saved.
By clicking the selected button, all financial data bases are saved on the USB disk.
By clicking the selected button, all data on the statistics of ball dropping is saved on the USB disk.
By clicking the selected button, log files are saved on the USB disc.
By clicking the selected button, all files of internal significance are saved.
By clicking the selected button, the current program of the gaming device (e.g. ruleta.exe) is saved internally on the PC.
![Page 56: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 56
ERASE USB STICK By clicking the key, the program automatically deletes the contents of the following folders:
[3225893] (folder whose name is the number of the WIBU key) [bases] [config] [financial] [log] [service] [statistics]
USERS By clicking the users key, the program saves all necessary data on the users of the BiOS software tool. They are saved on the USB disk:
[3225893] [config] [auth] [users] user1 user2
In the files user1.xml and user2.xml all settings on the users are saved. These settings cannot be changed on any other computer because they are protected. GAME SETUP By clicking the selected button, all setup files of the gaming device are saved on the USB disk. When you click the button, the computer automatically creates two folders, where all necessary files are saved.
[3225893] [baze] players.mdb setup.mdb [config] [etc] [application]
![Page 57: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 57
[ruleta] setup.xml financialreport.xml mechanical.xml commconfig.cfg Descriptions of the individual databases and files are in the document ALL FILES DESCRIPTION. FINANCIAL DATA By clicking the button, the program automatically saves all necessary data on the financial situation of the gaming device. They are saved in the data folder, created by the program. The only thing you have to do is to insert the USB flash disk.
[3225893] [financial] play1-play10.mdb RuletaFinance.mdb Descriptions of the individual databases and files are in the document ALL FILES DESCRIPTION. STATISTICS By clicking the button, all data on the gaming device statistics is saved in the statistics folder, automatically created by the program. In our case, this is electronic roulette. An example of saving to a database record is shown below.
[3225893] [statistics] RuletaStat.mdb A more accurate description of the RuletaStat.mdb database is given in the above-mentioned document.
![Page 58: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 58
LOG FILES By clicking the log files button, a dialog box opens, which enables you to copy all selected log files on the USB disk. They are saved in the log folder, which is created automatically.
Figure 11: Presentation of a log file transfer window
As you can see in the figure above, the log file transfer window can be divided into three parts:
1 Part 1, where all log files of the gaming device are collected 2 Part 2, with all log files that you want to transfer to the USB disk 3 part 3, with the log file transfer command buttons
Explanation of the individual keys in part 3:
By clicking the selected button, a dialog box opens, in which you select the type of the log files. The types you can select among are described in the paragraph below.
By clicking this button, all log files will be transferred from the first to the second part.
![Page 59: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 59
This key is used to transfer only certain log files according to the date. By single-clicking the button, all files that are 10 days old (with respect to the current date) will be transferred.
This key functions the same as the one mentioned above.
With this button the contents of the second part is erased.
By clicking this button, you cancel the log file transfer to the USB disk.
By clicking this button, you transfer the selected log files to the USB disk.
By clicking the OK button, all log files will be transferred to the USB disk. The program automatically creates a log folder in which the transferred files are saved. [3225893] [log] RuletaLog00001.zip RuletaLog00002.zip RuletaLog00003.zip The log file contents are read-only, which means that they cannot be changed. Selecting individual log files: As mentioned above, you can select log file backup by clicking the button »OPEN«. A window opens in which you select the files that you want to backup.
![Page 60: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 60
Figure 12: Log file selection
As seen in the figure above, it is possible to select among various types of log files: <ROOT> (log files of other origin) BasicFinancialConfig BiOS (OS log files are collected here) BiOS security CommConfig (CommConfig application logs) CommConfigCOM (CommConfigCOM application logs) CommConfigSerial CommController (CommController application logs) Diag (Diag application logs) FinStats GCBackup (all automatic data backup log files are collected here) Ruleta (all log files of the gaming device are collected here) Spanish (all log files that are used for the Spanish version of the gaming device are collected here) SERVICE DATA By clicking the selected button, the program automatically creates a service folder on the USB disk, in which certain files are saved.
[3225893] [service]
![Page 61: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 61
[baze] ReadBall.dat BonusTable.dat Bonus5000Percent01-Bonus5000Percent010 bonus.dat BonusPercente01.dat - BonusPercente10.dat BonusTable.dat Drop.dat Hopper.dat Null.dat Mechanical.dat Lottery.dat HeapData.dat
[layouts] defaulty .xml touchscreen.xml
status.reg All of the above-mentioned files are important for the operation of the roulette. A detailed description of these files can be found in the ALL FILES DESCRIPTION document. GAME BINARY By clicking this button, the program copies and renames the current ruleta.exe, which is located in X:/Ruleta. The program carries out backup of the current file, not on the USB, but somewhere on X; the user can thus use this file at any time.
![Page 62: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 62
3.1.3 RESTORE MENU
Restore menu is very similar to the backup menu. The only thing that differs is the operation principle. With the backup menu the data was saved from C:/Ruleta to the USB flash disk. Here, the data is copied in the opposite direction, i.e. from the USB disk into C:/Ruleta.
PC OF GAMING MACHINE USB FLASH DISCRESTORE FROM
Figure 13: Principle of use of the restore operation
The figure above shows the principle of use of the restore operation. There are several different keys in this menu:
By clicking the selected key, all data on users will be transferred from the USB flash disk to the gaming machine. By clicking the selected key, all data on the gaming device settings will be transferred from the USB disk to the gaming machine.
By clicking the selected key, you create ruleta.exe from the exe, which was created by clicking the exe binary key in the backup menu.
By clicking the selected key, the data of the smart keys will be trsnsfered to the USB key.
By clicking the selected key, you update the gaming machine software.
![Page 63: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 63
RESTORE USERS By clicking the selected key, you copy all settings on users from the USB disk to the gaming machine. For proper operation of device, all users' data on the flash disk have to be saved in the folder config/auth/users. You can create this folder by yourself, or in other words it is created by the software tool itself, when you click the users key in the backup menu. GAME SETUP By clicking the selected key, you copy all gaming machine settings from the USB flash disk to the gaming machine. Setup files are required here as well. They are located on the flash disc in the base folder. If they are located in any other base, the program will not be able to carry out the restore roulette setup function. An example of individual file setup is given on page 19, chapter Game setup. RESTORE GAME BINARIES By clicking the selected key, your gaming machine will use for its operation the same ruleta.exe that was created by clicking the key exe binary in the setup menu. In addition to the key exe from manual, there is also the version and the creation date of the last exe from manual, i.e. the date when the exe binary key in the setup menu was last pressed. PLAYERS DATABASE By clicking the selected key, the players database is transfered to USB key. Option is using for save the privileges for different smart keys. SYSTEM UPDATE By clicking the selected button, you can update any software tool or gaming machine equipment. Here mainly the software equipment manufactured by the Gold Club is being updated. You can update the software equipment by loading all necessary files to the USB disc and clicking the key system update. A dialog box will open in which you select the file (Figure 14) and press enter (2to1) on the keyboard.
![Page 64: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 64
Figure 14: An example of update box
You can get system update files from the gaming machine manufacturer. An example of system update files is presented below.
GameUpdate.Sound ANG 44S ............zip SystemUpdate.Autobackup........zip ConfigUpdate.Ruleta Layout......zip
GameUpdate.Sound ANG 44S ............zip is a file that you can use to update any software within the C:/Ruleta. Here mainly the mechanical counter settings, statistics files, etc. are being updated. SystemUpdate.Autobackup........zip is a file that you can use to update other gaming machine software equipment. Mainly the Privilege editor, GC terminal, etc. ConfigUpdate.Ruleta Layout......zip is a file that you can use to update a setup program, e.g. BiOS.exe and the related tools.
![Page 65: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 65
3.1.4 USERS MENU Users menu is used for users' management. Here you can add or delete users, change the rights of the individual users, etc. Users menu contains six independent keys:
By clicking the selected button, you add a new user.
By clicking the selected button, you delete a user.
By clicking the selected button, you determine the rights of an individual user.
By clicking the selected button, you determine the group to which the user belongs.
By clicking the selected button, you change the password of the selected user.
By clicking the selected button, you change the password of the user who is currently logged on.
![Page 66: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 66
ADD By clicking this key you can add a new user. A dialog box opens in which you enter the username and password of the new user in order to access the BiOS software tool.
Figure 15: Presentation of the »add users« box
You can select the username and password on your own. If the username consists of two words, they have to be written together (no space between them). In addition to the username you can also select a nickname of the user, at your own choice.
Figure 16: Presentation of friendly name selection
After entering the data, press enter and the program will automatically add the user. The user can be seen in the green window.
Figure 17: Presentation of a user that has been added to the system
DELETE By clicking a selected key, you can delete a user that has already been entered. When you click the key, a dialog box will open, in which you select the user that you want to delete. By pressing OK you confirm the delete function. If you do not want to delete the user, press CANCEL.
![Page 67: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 67
Figure 18: User selection box
You have to be very careful here because if you delete the administrator (BiOS), you will destroy the system. EDIT USER By pressing edit, you determine the rights of individual users. First a dialog box opens (Figure 18) in which you select the user. After clicking enter (2to1), a setup window opens, in which you set all rights of an individual user.
![Page 68: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 68
Figure 19: : Window for determining users' rights
As seen in the figure above, there are many settings here, which are very important. Any mistake, i.e. incorrect setting, can cause permanent damage. Description of individual settings: BiOS. StatsHitNumber The user is granted access to the falling number statistics. BiOS.FinancialFinStats The user is granted access to statistical data review. BiOS.DiagForceFSCheck The user is granted to run scan disk function. BiOS.DiagSoundTest The user is enabled to access the use of the sound check program. BiOS.DiagGCTerm The user is enabled to access the use of the GC terminal software tool. BiOS.DiagLogViewer The user is enabled to review the gaming machine log files. BiOS.DiagIdentifyMonitor The user is enabled to check whether the monitor configuration is correct. BiOS.DiagSensorTest The user is granted access to the sensor test software tool. BiOS.DiagCounterCheck
![Page 69: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 69
The user is enabled to check the consistency of the program counters. BiOS.UsersMyPassword The user is enabled to change the password of the user who is currently logged on. BiOS.UsersPassword The user is enabled to change users' passwords. BiOS.UsersSetClass The user is enabled to add various users to the groups. BiOS.UsersEdit The user is enabled to change the rights of individual users. BiOS.UsersDelete The user is enabled to delete users from the system. BiOS.UsersAdd The user is enabled to add new users into the system. BiOS.RestoreSystemUpdate The user is enabled to change the main program of the gaming machine (Ruleta.exe) via the USB disk. BiOS.RestoreGameUpdate The user is enabled to change the main program of the gaming machine (Ruleta.exe) within the machine BiOS.RestoreGameSetup The user is enabled to transfer the gaming machine setup files from the USB disc to the gaming machine. BiOS.RestoreUsers The user is enabled to transfer the user's files from the USB disc to the gaming machine. BiOS.BackupEraseUSB The user is enabled to delete the contents of certain folders (base, config, financial, log, BiOS.BackupService The user is enabled to save certain service files on the USB disk. BiOS.BackupStats The user is enabled to save the statistics of the ball drops. BiOS.BackupFinancial The user is enabled to save financial data of the machine on the USB disk. BiOS.BackupLogFiles The user is enabled to save log files on the USB disk. BiOS.BackupGameSetup The user is enabled to save gaming machine setup files to the USB disk. BiOS.BackupUsers The user is enabled to save files about the users on the USB disk. BiOS.ConfigServices The user is enabled to set system services. BiOS.ConfigCommCtrlCfg The user is enabled to set serial ports. BiOS.ConfigAutobackup The user is granted access to the settings of autobackup function.
![Page 70: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 70
BiOS.ConfigLogger The user is granted access to the level settings of log file recording. BiOS.ConfigGameSetup The user is granted or denied access to game setup. BiOS.ConfigGCDBEditor The user is granted access to the setup table of the machine. BiOS.ConfigRuletaString The user is enabled to arrange text field of the gaming machine. BiOS.ConfigMobile The user is granted access to the Mobile software tool, which is used for the wavecom modem configuration. BiOS.ConfigMechanical The user is granted access to use the Mechanical Counters Setup software tool, which is used for mechanical counter configuration. BiOS.ConfigPrivEdit The user is granted access to use the Privilege editor software tool. Shutdown The user is enabled to turn off the gaming machine via the BiOS software tool. BiOS The user is granted or denied access to the BiOS system. service, statistics) on the USB disk. How to grant a right to a user to use certain programs First assign the user to a certain group. See chapter Assign to group. When the user has been assigned to a group, click Edit user and a setup window (Figure 20) will open. Select a certain right (e.g. BiOS.DiagSoundTest), which you either enable (yes) or (read only) or (no) in the right corner.
Figure 20: Presentation of how to grant a right
![Page 71: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 71
ASSIGN TO GROUP By clicking this button, you add a new user to the group. A dialog box will open after the click (Figure 18) in which you select the user. Confirm the selection by clicking enter. A new window will open (Figure 21) in which you assign the selected user to a group.
Figure 21: User group selection
As seen in the figure above, there are four different groups available: • no_group • admin • finadmin • service Description of the individual groups: no_group: The user in this group does not have any rights, i.e. does not have access to the BiOS software tool. admin: The user in this group has all the rights to use the BiOS software tool. He/she can change some settings, transfer data files to the USB disc and vice versa, can arrange the rights of the individual users, etc.
![Page 72: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 72
finadmin: The user in this group has the same privileges that the user in admin group plus meters statistics (finances). service: This user group has the most limitations. The user in this group can only access basic functions and BiOS tools. He/she can only use the functions and tools that are needed for the gaming machine repair services, such as GC Terminal, Log viewer, Sound tester, etc.. ASSIGN PASSWORD This function enables you to change the BiOS access password. After clicking this key, a window will open (Figure 22). Here you select the user, for whom the software tool password will be changed. After the selection, click enter and a new window will be displayed in which you change the password.
Figure 22: The window in which you change the password of a selected
As seen in the figure above, the dialog box requires you to enter the new password twice. Confirm password modification by clicking OK. Exit the window without having confirmed the changes by pressing ESC. CHANGE MY PASSWORD This function enables you to change the password of the user who is currently logged on. When you click the my password key, a window will open in which you can change the password.
![Page 73: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 73
Figure 23: Presentation of a window in which you can change the password of the currently
logged-on user
As seen in the figure, there are two boxes in the window. Enter the new password in both boxes and press enter OK to confirm.
![Page 74: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 74
3.1.5 DIAG MENU Diagnostics menu is the menu in which the person performing the repair services on the gaming machine can review the condition of the device. For example, after repair services have been carried out or certain parts have been replaced, their operation can be checked here. The menu consists of several functions:
By clicking the selected key, you start the GC Terminal software tool, which enables you to check the operation of all electronic parts of the device. By clicking the selected key, you start a software tool, which enables you to examine the contents of the gaming device log files. By clicking the selected key, you can check the correct monitor connection. By clicking the selected key, you start a program, which enables you to examine the operation of sound files. By clicking the selected key the program toll for set the meters is opened.
By clicking the selected button, a set-up window opens, in which certain financial settings of the gaming device are adjusted. By clicking the selected button the machine will automatically scan the both flash disks. The scan disk function will happened after restart.
![Page 75: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 75
GC TERMINAL By clicking the selected key, a GC Terminal software tool will open. This software tool enables you to examine the operation of all electronic components of the gaming machine. You can find its detailed description and use in the GC TERMINAL document. VIEW LOG’S By clicking the selected key, a software tool will open that enables you to examine all gaming device log files. By examining them you can easily determine all possible defects and faults. The log file examination window is presented below:
Figure 24: Presentation of a log file control window
As seen in the figure above, the software consists of three parts:
1. Part 1, in which all log files are shown 2. Part 2, in which the contents of an individual log file is shown 3. Part 3, containing all of the keys that are relevant for examination operations
![Page 76: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 76
Description of individual keys:
By clicking the selected drop list, select the text that you want to look for in the log file. You can select among various words: check all errors, check ball status, etc.
By clicking the selected button, a new selection box will open, in which you select the log file type. See the example below.
By clicking the selected button, the log viewer program toll will be closed.
By clicking the selected button the search window opens.
An example of how to search for certain data in the log file:
For searching for some predefined event's is necessary to select it (drop-down list) and pressing find button. All log files which has searching event are showing in the left part. In the Diag menu, click the Log view key in order to open the window in which you can examine the log files. Then click OPEN and select the log file type (Figure 30).
![Page 77: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 77
Figure 25: Selection of log file type
As seen in the figure, it is possible to select among several different log files. The most frequent user of the gaming device log files (games) is the person carrying out the repair service.You can access them by selecting Ruleta in the window and confirming it by clicking OK. The names of all log files will be shown in the left (first) part of the window. You can open a log file by selecting it and pressing enter. IDENTIFY MONITOR This function enables us to check whether the monitors at the individual gaming spots are set correctly. By clicking the selected key, a number will be shown on each monitor. If the sequence of numbers is correct, the monitors are located properly.
Figure 26:Monitors presentation
SOUND TEST By clicking the sound test key, you can open a program that enables you to test the gaming machine’s sound. You have to select a file in the drop list. Double-click the file and the sound will begin to play. You can set the volume of the sound by moving the sliding button.
![Page 78: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 78
Figure 27: Selection of files for sound reproduction
Description of individual keys:
By clicking the settings, you will enable constant playing of the selected sound file.
By clicking the selected button, you will close the software tool.
By moving the sliding cursor, you can change the volume of the sound.
CONFIGURE METERS VIEW By clicking on the CONFIGURE BASIC FIN. VIEW button, a configuration window will open in which the meters can be selected. Only these will be displayed in the STOP DIALOG window. This can be achieved by first selecting the gaming machine and then selecting the METERS REVIEW button or the FINANCE button. Display and description of individual meters By clicking on the desired button, a configuration window will open in which the individual meters can be set. The window is comprised of two parts: - the left-hand side (Config tree), where the items (ITEMS) can be defined, and
![Page 79: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 79
- the right-hand side (Meters), where the values for individual items (METERS) can be set.
Figure 28: Meters setting window
As already mentioned above, the left-hand side is used for adding individual items. Here we can add items or meters that will be displayed as a group, or meters which will be displayed according to individual gaming locations. Setting group meters Meters that will be displayed as “global” or “temp” are defined in the rubric “spec1” or in the rubric “spec2”. Meters in the rubric “spec1” will be displayed as “global1/temp1”, whereas meters in the rubric “spec2” will be displayed as “global2/temp2”. All meters are displayed in the stop dialog window, which can be opened by clicking on the meters review button or the finance button.
![Page 80: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 80
How to set (add) a meter to an individual item First, choose into which category you would like to set the meter. As an example, we will use “spec1”. Then, click on the desired ITEM and, on the right-hand side, select the desired meter (bet, games, win, input, etc.). Additionally, the defined parameters must be filled in. These are shown and described below.
• meter The program automatically enters the values for the chosen meter. • ratio Define the ratio of the individual meter. • description Enter the description of the individual meter. • spec Define the specification of the individual meter. • meter inp Select if the chosen meter is input. • meter out Select if the chosen meter is output. An example of the printout of individual parameters is shown in the figure below.
![Page 81: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 81
Figure 29: An example of a printout of individual parameters
Entry or specification of individual items is confirmed by clicking on the “update items” button. How to add a new item or new meter A new item can be added by first selecting the category into which you want to add the item. This can be, for example, “item1”, “item2” or “players”. Once selected, click on “add item”. The new item will be added automatically. The procedure for specifying additional items is the same as the procedure described above, only a different meter is chosen in the window meters. How to delete added items To delete an added item, first select it and then click on the “remove item” button. Setting meters for individual gaming locations Meters for displaying the values of individual gaming locations are set in the rubric “param_player”, with player 1 represented in temp1/global1 and player2 represented in temp2/global 2. In this case as well, the individual meters are entered based on the same principle used for group meters. The following figure shows an example of the meters according to individual gaming locations.
![Page 82: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 82
Figure 30: Meters according to individual gaming locations
Description of individual meters WIN Counts the credits won. BET Counts bet credits. GAMES Counts the number of games. CRE_IN Counts the total number of credits paid. The option is not in use.If you want to prepare a meter for all input credits you must select CRE_IN_REM, CRE_IN_KEY, CRE_IN_BA, CRE_IN_COIN. CRE_OUT Counts the total number of credits paid out. The option is not in use.If you want to prepare a meter for all output credits you must select CRE_OUT_REM, CRE_OUT_KEY, CRE_OUT_TK, CRE_OUT_COIN CRE_IN_REM Counts the number of credits paid via the on – line system CRE_IN_KEY Counts the number of credits paid via the smart key. CRE_IN_BA Counts the number of credits paid via the bill acceptor.
![Page 83: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 83
CRE_OUT_REM Counts the number of credits, paid out via the on – line system CRE_OUT_KEY Counts the number of credits, paid out via the smart key. CRE_OUT_TK Counts the number of credits, paid out via the ticket printer BILLS_A – BILLS_F Counts the number of individual bills inserted. BILLS Counts the total number of inserted bills. LCK Counts how many times the player station is locked DOOR Counts how many times the door was been opened. CRE_IN_COIN Counts the number of credits paid via the coin acceptors. CRE_OUT_COIN Counts the number of credits, paid out via the hoppers. CRE_IN_JP Counts the number of credits paid via jackpot. POWER_ON Counts the number of times the roulette has been switched on. ERROR Counts the number of errors on the gaming device. SW Counts the number of times the security swithes has been activated. COINS_A – COINS_F Counts the number of the individual coins inserted. COINS Counts the total number of inserted coins. CRE_IN_COIN_HOPPER Counts the number of credits in hopper. CRE_IN_COIN_DROP Counts the number of credits in dropbox. CRE_OUT_HANDPAY Counts the number of credits, paid out via handpay. TIP Counts the number of credits for German tips.
![Page 84: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 84
FINANCIAL STATS By clicking the selected button, a window opens in which you can set or review the financial data of the gaming device. This software tool enables you to review the entire financial statistics of the gaming device. The set-up window or respectively, the review window is presented in the figure below.
Figure 31: : Gaming device financial statistics
As shown in the figure above, it is divided into three parts:
- Meters - Grid - Chart
Description and use of the individual parts:
![Page 85: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 85
METERS: In this part, the user selects meters that will later be shown in numerical or graphic mode. As this part contains a wide selection of settings, we will take a look at the significance of the individual meters and the commands that are used for selection or switching among the individual configuration boxes. As shown in Figure 31, the METERS window consists of three parts: - Standard meters - Expression meters - Meter groups selection To switch between the individual parts the »ZERO SPIEL« key is used. Method of selecting individual meters and description of individual meters To select the individual parameters you can choose between two different settings. You can select each meter separately (standard meters) or you can select a group of meters (meter groups selection). Selection of meters in standard meters: In the standard menu, press the button »ZERO SPIEL« several times, until the words »standard meters« become red. Move around in the menu using the »RED«, »BLACK«, »ODD« and »EVEN« keys and select an individual meter with the key »2nd 12«. The figure below shows an example of selection of the individual meters.
![Page 86: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 86
Figure 32: Selection of meters in the window standard meters
Description of individual meters: Bet Counts bet credits. Win Counts the credits won. Games Counts the number of games. Credit in – key Counts the number of credits paid via the smart key. Credit in Counts the total number of credits paid. Credit in – bill acceptor Counts the number of credits paid via the bill acceptor. Credit in – coin acceptor Counts the number of credits paid via the coin acceptor. Credit in – remote Counts the number of credits paid via the on – line system Credit out – key Counts the number of credits, paid out via the smart key. Credit out Counts the total number of paid out credits. Credit out – ticket Counts the number of credits, paid out via the ticket printer. Credit out – remote Counts the number of credits, paid out via the on – line system. Credit out – hopper Counts the number of credits, paid out via hopper.
![Page 87: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 87
BillsA-BillsF Counts the number of individual bills inserted. Bills Counts the total number of inserted bills. CoinsA-CoinsD Counts the number of the individual coins inserted. Coins Counts the total number of inserted coins. Error Counts the number of errors on the gaming device. Power ON Counts the number of times the roulette has been switched on. Arranging and changing the names of the individual parameters: If you are registered as a system administrator the program enables you to change the names of the individual meters. You can do that by pressing the »enter« (central 2to1) key in the Standard meters window. An editor will open, which enables you to edit or change the names of the individual meters. An example is presented in the figure below.
![Page 88: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 88
Figure 33: Presentation of a window in which you can change names
As seen in the figure above, it is possible to change the names of all parameters. You can select names according to your own judgement. If you change the names of any parameters you have to save changes before closing the window. You do so by pressing the UPDATE button. First set focus (zero spiel) on it and then press enter (central 2to1). Close the window by using the Close button or Escape (Neighbours), but that will also cancel the possible name changes. Selection of meters in the meter groups selection This selection is very similar to the previous one, but the program selects a suitable group of meters in the standard meters after you have selected a certain value. You can reach the predefined selection by pressing the »zero spiel« button until the window turns red. The example is shown below.
![Page 89: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 89
Figure 34: Example of selection of predefined meters
The selection of individual values is exactly the same as for the previous selection. Move around the meters with the »red« »black« key and confirm by clicking the »2nd12« key.
As mentioned above, the program automatically selects the related parameters in the standard meters or in the expression meters after you have selected a certain parameter. Some examples are shown below.
![Page 90: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 90
Similarly to the previous selection, you can open the window with additional settings by pressing enter (central 2to1). The window is similar to the one for changing the names of meters, however, the group to which the selected meter belongs is determined here for the individual meters. One of the following groups can be determined for an individual meter: none, main, credit in, credit out, bills, coins, and custom. A group is selected by entering the name of the group or by selecting it from a list, which you can open by using the keys Alt+down.
![Page 91: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 91
Figure 35: Meter grouping
Selection of meters in expression meters In the expression meters section the user can prepare his/her own meters that can consist of the standard or pre-composed meters. This can be carried out only by users enabled to do so. The selection of individual meters is the same as in the previous two parts, therefore it is not necessary to describe it again. We are going to concentrate on the preparation of one's own meter. First, place the focus on the mentioned window and click enter (central 2to1). A set-up window opens in which all the necessary parameters are set. It is shown in the figure below.
![Page 92: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 92
Figure 36: Window where you enter a new meter
As shown in the figure above, it is necessary to select certain parameters in order to enter your own meter. These are selected in the right part of the set-up window. Description of individual parameters: expr.name enter the name of the formula or parameter aggregates select the aggregate type (sum, min, max, avg, etc.) This parameter is used only in combination with the parameter Meter A meter A select the first meter operator select the operator between the meter A and meter B or between meter A and value meter B select the second meter value if you enter a certain value here, the program will consider meter A and the value. After finishing the entry, you have to confirm it by pressing the button »ADD expr«. Similarly you can change the parameters of the existing composed meters. Save changes by pressing the Update expr button. An existing composed meter can be deleted by selecting it from the list and deleting it with the button Delete expr.
![Page 93: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 93
GRID: All values of the previously selected parameters are shown here. If the review of the individual gaming spots is active you can see all meters at an individual gaming spot.
Figure 37: Review of finances according to the individual gaming spots
The figure above shows all parameters of an individual gaming spot. In our case, this is the gaming spot number 1. If the user selects display according to the individual gaming spots, the display will not depend on the meter selection in the menu; the program will show all active meters at that spot. We can select between temp and global at the individual spot. The display is somewhat different if the data for the entire gaming machine is being reviewed. Only the data that we have selected in the meters set-up window are shown here and you can select between the temp and global.
![Page 94: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 94
Figure 38: Review of the gaming machine finances
Additional settings are available here for the columns in the table. You can open the window with the additional settings by putting the focus on the Custom column box and pressing the space key (2nd12). Sorting criteria for the individual columns can be set (increasing, decreasing, without) and the type of calculation for a column (sum, min, max, avg, count). An additional option is to export the data from the table to the file, either to the HTML, XML, TXT or XLS file. When selecting the export file, press the key combination CTRL+E (SERIES+9).
The operator has another option with data direction. With this option the operator can print all data, but the preliminary condition is that the ticket printers are installed. When the button PRINT is pressed the setting window is opening. The window is showed on the picture below.
![Page 95: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 95
Figure 39: Data print setting window
How can we print the data with using ticket printers? In the first window »meter list« are all meters witch we can print. If we want to print any meter which is not in this list we must first set it in the main window »meters; see page 16«. In the »meters to be printed« window are all meters witch will be printed? The operator can also set printing order. This mean that we can set which meter is printing first, witch second, etc. For doing this the »up« and »down« buttons are used. Operator can also add the border line between two columns (add border button). Presence of the border line is visible like --delimiter-- text between to meters in the meters to be printed window. Beside this the operator can also delete (current or all) meters by the printed list. If the button »all« is pressed, all meters will be deleted. If just the meter is chosen and the button current is pressed, just this meter will be deleted. The operator can also set two additional settings. First one is Include Summary and the second one is Include Header. If you set Include Summary the printer will print beside all meters also the sum of the separate column. If the Include header option is set the printer will print the header of separate columns. For printing the data the button PRINT must be pressed.
![Page 96: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 96
CHART: Graphical statistics of the gaming device are shown here, either the entire statistics or the statistics for the individual gaming spots. The same as in the previous part, the user has the option to select between the temp and global.
Figure 40: An example of graphical statistics presentation for individual gaming spots
The difference between the graphic presentation of an individual gaming spot and the joint statistics is that in the joint statistics the user selects among three types of data display: bar chart line chart pie chart If you select the Pie chart type, you can select the meter that you want to see in the drop-down menu by the chart. You can only select among the meters that were selected in the Meters tab.
![Page 97: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 97
Figure 41: Example of pie chart presentation of the bet meter statistics
HIT NUMBER STATISTICS Option is used to check the falling numbers statistics. In the picture below is an example how the statistics looks. What some numbers mean? In the horizontal line are all numbers on the wheel and in vertical line is the data how many times different number fall.
![Page 98: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 98
Figure 42: Falling number's statistics
![Page 99: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION BiOS SETUP
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 99
3.1.6 SYSTEM INFO
System info is a kind of help for the users when examining certain components of the gaming device. This section should contain certain information about the device:
- BiOS software tool version - Main program version - Versions of certain hardware components (mainboard, keyboard controller, etc) - Disc space data - etc.
An example of System info window is given below.
Figure 43: System info
![Page 100: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
INVERTER
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 101: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT
1.0 INVERTER’S DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................. 3
2.0 INVERTER AND MAIN BOARD COMMUNICATION.................................................... 4
3.0 INVERTER’S CONNECTORS .............................................................................................. 5 3.1 SINGLE CONNECTORS DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................... 5
3.1.1 KEY ................................................................................................................................................. 5 3.1.2 COM................................................................................................................................................ 5 3.1.3 TERMINAL STRIP........................................................................................................................ 6 3.1.4 CONTACT PANEL ........................................................................................................................ 6
4.0 PROGRAMMING INVERTER ............................................................................................. 7 4.1 PROGRAMMING INVERTER PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 7
5.0 INVERTER’S COMMANDS.................................................................................................. 8
![Page 102: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 INVERTER’S DESCRIPTION Inverter is a device used to change the main motor’s (plate’s motor) rotation speed. Inverter is changing the speed in proportion with the frequency. If the frequency is higher, the speed is higher the and vice versa. For the proper functioning the inverter needs to be programmed and certain parameters need to be set. That can be done by using a special key. The external image of the inverter is shown in the figure 1.
Figure 1: Frequency inverter commander SE
1.1 DISPLAYS DESCRIPTION
Frequency inverter consists of two displays and six keys. They are located in the upper part of the inverter. The displays are used to show certain values while the keys are used for programming.
Figure 2: Demonstration of the keys and displays purpose
![Page 103: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.0 INVERTER AND MAIN BOARD COMMUNICATION Inverter is connected to the main board with the INVERTER cable. These two elements (main board and inverter) communicate in impulses. It is a one way communication in direction main board → inverter. The main board is sending to the inverter four bit commands of which three bits are used as information about the spinning frequency, while the other bit is used to switch the inverter on or off. The motor reaches its highest speed when all of the three bits are set up to »0«.
Figure 3: Inverter and main board communication
The steps of changing the motor’ speed is shown in the table below.
COMMAND BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 DESCRIPTION HIT 0 0 0 0 1 Stand by HIT 1 1 1 1 0 First rotation speed HIT 2 1 1 0 0 Second rotation speed HIT 3 1 0 1 0 Third rotation speed HIT 4 1 0 0 0 Fourth rotation speed HIT 5 0 1 1 0 Fifth rotation speed HIT 6 0 1 0 0 Sixth rotation speed HIT 7 0 0 1 0 Seventh rotation speed HIT 8 0 0 0 0 Eight rotation speed
log »0« =0V log »1«=+24V
![Page 104: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
3.0 INVERTER’S CONNECTORS As all the other electronic devices the inverter also has a certain number of connectors. These connectors are used to connect external devices as motors, computers, etc. All of the inverter’s connectors are shown in the figure below.
Figure 4: Inverter’s connectors
3.1 SINGLE CONNECTORS DESCRIPTIONS
3.1.1 KEY
It is used to connect the key which is used to programme the frequency inverter.
3.1.2 COM
It is used for the serial RS 485 communication. That protocol is not used by us, so that connector stays off line.
![Page 105: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
3.1.3 TERMINAL STRIP It is used for the impulse communication between the main board and inverter. These two elements are connected with an inverter cable which is shown in the figure below.
Figure 5: Inverter cable
3.1.4 CONTACT PANEL
On the first three connectors (L1, N, and PE) the 230 V voltages are connected. That voltage is connected with the use of highly frequented filter used to separate high frequencies. On the next four connectors the three phase synchronous motor is connected which is used to spin the plate. The motor’s connection is shown in the figure below.
Figure 6: Demonstration of the motor’s connection
![Page 106: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
4.0 PROGRAMMING INVERTER As mentioned before the inverter has to be programmed in order to function properly. That can be done by using a special key.
4.1 PROGRAMMING INVERTER PROCEDURE • unwind the cover and insert the enclosed key “the key must be inserted when the POWER IS OFF “ • connect the inverter to a 230 V voltage • switch on the manual switch (distribution box → manual switch) • press the mode button (M) • by using the navigational keys (increase, decrease) select 10 • press the mode button (M) • by using the navigational keys (increase, decrease) select L2 • press the mode button (M) • by using the navigational keys (increase, decrease) select 28 • press the mode button (M) • by using the navigational keys (increase, decrease) select read and press stop/reset key (red key) • wait for 5s • switch off loading Programming procedure is also shown in the figure below.
![Page 107: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION INVERTER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Figure 7: Demonstration of the inverter’s programming procedure
5.0 INVERTER’S COMMANDS Inverter’s functioning can also be checked in the Terminal Emulator. That can be done by starting the terminal emulator and selecting the communicational port and the transmission’s speed. COM port: COM2 Speed: 9600 bit/s
COMMAND RESPONSE DESCRIPTION
ON POWER ON switch the main board ON HIT 0 HIT OK stop turning the plate HIT 1 HIT OK turning the plate in first speed HIT 2 HIT OK turning the plate in second speed HIT 3 HIT OK turning the plate in third speed HIT 4 HIT OK turning the plate in fourth speed HIT 5 HIT OK turning the plate in the fifth HIT 6 HIT OK turning the plate in the sixth HIT 7 HIT OK turning the plate in the seventh speed HIT 8 HIT OK turning the plate in the eighth speed
![Page 108: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION DISTRIBUTION BOX
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
ROULETTE CONNECTION AND
DISTRIBUTION BOX DESCRIPTION
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 109: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION DISTRIBUTION BOX
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 THE ROULETTE’S CONNECTION .................................................................................... 3
1.1 DISTRIBUTION BOX DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 3
![Page 110: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION DISTRIBUTION BOX
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 THE ROULETTE’S CONNECTION To function properly the roulette needs 230V of AC current. Use 3x2.5mm2 cable. Cable entry is connected in the distribution box on the first three connection pins. The electric poles must not be mistakenly substituted. Always use the next following order: L (phase)…...left end N (null)……..the middle PE (gnd)…....right end
1.1 DISTRIBUTION BOX DESCRIPTION The distribution box is a box in which all of the roulette’s main switches are placed. Beside the switches also the over voltage protection, the contactor, safety fuses and the electric pins used to connect the cable entry are placed there. On every pin and switch in the distribution box there is a high voltage, so it needs to be open with special precaution. THE DISTRIBUTION BOX ELEMENTS As mentioned above the distribution box consists of the elements used to switch on and to protect single electrical systems. Elements used to switch on the system are switches and the contactor, while the safety elements are the safety fuses and the over voltage protection. All of the safety fuses in the distribution box are automatic - they don’t need to be replaced after the failure. The elements’ distribution in the distribution box is shown in the picture below.
Figure 1: Distribution box elements
![Page 111: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION DISTRIBUTION BOX
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
• Connection pins (L, N, and PE) Used to connect the entry cable. Be careful with the electric poles distribution. Before the main switch is switched on, use the current indicator to check the proper connection (the indicator has to light only on the L (phase) connection pin). • Over voltage protection Used to protect single electrical systems from the voltage that is too high. That can happen when the lightning strikes, etc. In case the over voltage protector is ruined the indicator doesn’t light. • Main switch Used to switch on or off the roulette’s current. When the roulette is connected to the electric grid, the main switch needs to be switched on. At the daily turn off of the roulette, the main switch remains switched on. It is switched off only in case of roulette’s malfunction. • Manual switch Used to switch on the roulette manually. It is used mainly for service purposes. • Contactor Used to switch on the single electrical systems automatically. • Automatic safety fuses • CTRL (B6) The safety fuse used to protect the electronic (power box, manual sw) from overloading
and the short circuit. • ROOF (B10) The safety fuse used to protect the roof from overloading and the short circuit. • PWR SUPPLY (B16) The safety fuse used to protect the inverter, UPS and transformer from overloading and
the short circuit. • MONIT (C20) The safety fuse used to protect monitors from overloading and the short circuit.
![Page 112: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ERROR'S LIST
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
SERVICE MANUAL
(ERROR’S LIST)
![Page 113: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ERROR'S LIST
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
SERVICE MANUAL (ERROR LIST DESCRIPTION) Debug error list for authorised service personal ONLY 1. Error 1. PC Reset The program was not shut down correctly (incorrect exit from the program). Possible faults:
- PC block - Power supply cable of the PC - UPS fault - Power supply cable of the UPS - Roulette switched off with the POWER key - Program stopped with the PC keyboard
2. Error 2. Communication with COM 2 Fault on the main CPU Possible faults:
- CPU on main PC is not responding - COM 2 on PC is not working - Check PC power supply - Check serial communication cable
3. Error 3. The ball was located on the cylinder during the start-up check During the check of the cylinder and sensors something was detected on the cylinder Possible faults:
- The sensor is not set correctly - There is dirt or dust on the cylinder - Transmitting IR LED is not working or it is dirty - The zero location sensor is not set correctly
4. Error 4. There was a error locating the ball A mistake occurred during the sensor-reading period Possible faults:
- The cylinder sensor is not set correctly - Check the sensor cable and jacks - Check COM 2 cable
![Page 114: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ERROR'S LIST
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
- Check that the computer is not overloaded 5. Error 5. Unable to locate the ball During the blow period the sensor has not located the ball Possible faults:
- Check the ball is not blocked in the blowing tube - If the ball is on the cylinder check that the cylinder sensor is set correctly
6. Error 6. Unable to blow out the ball After the blow the status sensor has found the ball still on the start position Possible faults:
- Check if the blow compressor is working - Check if the status sensor is working - Check there is no dust on start position sensor
7. Error 7. Power failure: Power supply has failed Possible faults:
- Check for mains power - Check the fuses and circuit breakers
8. Error 8. The ball remained on the cylinder The ball has not returned to the start position Possible faults:
- Check the lift motor and the mechanism for correct operation - Check that the ball is not stuck in the drop system or under the cylinder - Check if the status sensor is working
9. Error 10. Error writing to databases An error occurred during the writing of a database Possible faults:
- Check databases in c:\Ruleta\baze folder - Check that there are no errors on the Hard Disk - Delete lock files and restart
10. Error 12. Maximum location rotations exceeded The cylinder has made the maximum number of turns and has failed to located the ball Possible faults:
![Page 115: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ERROR'S LIST
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
- After the blow out the ball has not arrived on the cylinder - On start-up the program has not located the ball - Check if the sensors are working
11. Error 13. On safe start the ball was not located for 2 rotations The program automatically turns to safe start if the ball was not found for 2 rotations Possible faults:
- Check the location of the ball - Check if the sensors are working properly
12. Error 15. Unable to read databases The program was not able to read from the database Possible faults:
- Check there are errors on hard disk - Delete database lock files in C:\Ruleta\baze - Delete playx.mdb databases in folder C:\Ruleta\Baze\ ( Play1.mdb,
Play2.mdb, ………, Play8.mdb, …) 13. Error 16. Opening of the databases During the start the program was unable to open the databases Possible faults:
- Check for errors on hard disk - Check if the databases for corruption - Delete playx.mdb databases in folder C:\Ruleta\Baze\ ( Play1.mdb,
Play2.mdb, ……… ,Play8.mdb, …) 14. Error 19. During opening of COM ports During initialisation the program failed to open one or more communication ports Possible faults:
- Check communication cards and ports are working properly - Check if any other program is using the ports
15. Error 20. No response from COM 2 An error occurred on communication between the PC and Com2 Possible faults:
- Check if COM 2 is working properly - Check if CPU is responding
![Page 116: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ERROR'S LIST
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
- Check communication cable 16. Error 22. Registry error. A mistake occurred during data transfer to the windows register Possible faults:
- Check for errors on hard disk - Check databases are not corrupt in folder C:\Ruleta\Baze - Delete playx.mdb databases in folder C:\Ruleta\Baze\ ( Play1.mdb,
Play2.mdb, ……… ,Play8.mdb, …) 17. Error 23. Negative values found in databases During data processing a negative value occurred in base Possible faults:
- Errors on hard disk - Delete playx.mdb databases in folder C:\Ruleta\Baze\ ( Play1.mdb,
Play2.mdb, ……… ,Play8.mdb, …) 18. Error 24. Registry error on start-up The program was not able to initialise the register Possible faults:
- Errors on hard disk - Check databases are not corrupt in folder C:\Ruleta\Baze - Delete playx.mdb databases in folder C:\Ruleta\Baze\ ( Play1.mdb,
Play2.mdb, ……… ,Play8.mdb, …) 19. Error 27. Unable to load coded Bitmap screen saver During initialisation the program was unable to load BMP screen saver Possible faults:
- Errors on hard disk - Reload BMP screen saver
20. Error 28. Initialisation of graphics cards The program during start unable to run all graphics cards Possible faults:
- Check if all the graphic cards are correctly located in the PCI slots - Check if the correct drivers are loaded for graphic cards in use
21. Error 29. Mechanical counter error A fault occurred on communication with the i/o board and the mechanical
![Page 117: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ERROR'S LIST
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
counters. Possible faults:
- Check if COM1 works correctly - Check if CPU on I/0 counter board is responding - Check communication cable - Check power supply to the I/O board
22. Error 30. Demonstration timer period exceeded Program locks on a predefined date and hour Program can be restarted with password 23. Error 31. Tamper switch error Program stops with activation of certain security switches Program can be restarted with password 24. Error 33. Time-out error The program has not received enough information from the sensors Possible faults:
- Check if the sensors are properly aligned - Check sensor cables - Check communication cable - Check if the cylinder is spinning at the correct speed
25. Error 34. Timing fault on Banknote acceptors Timing error on banknote impulse
- Control Banknote reader - Control Cable on banknote reader - Control Satellite I/O board under keyboard
26. Error 35. Error opening serial port 1 Unable to initialise COM1 27. Error 36. Status sensor error Fault on status sensor 28. Error 37. Online communication error Online communication has connection errors. 29. Error 38. Timeout of online communications
Timeout of online connection exceeded. 30. Error 39. Speed Variations detected on Cylinder
![Page 118: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ERROR'S LIST
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
Possible faults.
- Sensor faulty - FM motor controller - Control zero position sensor
31. Error 40. Change of configuration Contact Gold Club company. 32. Error 60. Change of configuration without producer permission Contact Gold Club company 33. Error 61. Sound error Possible faults
- Check if the sound card is working properly
34. Error 62. Finances error If this error is happen the problem is finances witch are used only for roulettes for Spanish market
Possible faults - Check Bonus.dat file - Check BonusTable.dat - Check Lottery.dat - Check on files in c:\Ruleta\Arhiv\Locations
35. Error 63. Power fail
Error is happen only when the main power is lost. If the error is happened a lot of time please check the main fuse or the UPS.
36. Error 64. Power fail It is the same than the error before.
37. Error 65. Difference a cycle time
If the error is happen means that the last game (cycle) is longer or shorter than the average cycle time.
For further information please email us on [email protected] or call service department on telephone number +386 57 311 562.
![Page 119: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
PROGRAM TOOL
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 120: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 SETUP....................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 USE ............................................................................................................................................ 5 3.1 ALL COMMANDS AND CODES .................................................................................................... 6
3.1.1 COMMANDS AND CODES FOR KEYBOARD .......................................................................... 6 3.1.2 COMMANDS AND CODES FOR MAINBOARD ...................................................................... 8
![Page 121: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 DESCRIPTION GC terminal is a program tool used to control the function of every single roulette’s component. GC terminal supports all of the roulette’s components (bill acceptors, coin acceptors, inverters, etc.). That enables you to check the function of every single component in the roulette. 2.0 SETUP
press OK
press setup
![Page 122: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
press continue
press OK
GC terminal program tool is set and ready for use.
![Page 123: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
3.0 USE It is quite simple to use the GC terminal. The working window opens by pressing the selected icon ( picture 5 ).
Picture 5: GC terminal window First you need to select the correct COM port. You have 16 different COM ports to choose from. For the program to work properly the correct selection of the COM port is essential. Single components connection is shown in the table below.
COM PORT IME KOMPONENTE 2 Main BOARD 5 Player position no. 1 6 Player position no. 2 7 Player position no. 3 8 Player position no. 4 9 Player position no. 5 10 Player position no. 6 11 Player position no. 7
![Page 124: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
12 Player position no. 8 13 Player position no. 9 14 Player position no. 10 15 wavecom modem 16 16 counters or cashless system
Table1: Single components connection
Beside the correct selection of the COM port the important thing to do is also to select the correct speed of data transfer- that is 9600 Kbit/s. When all of these parameters are selected properly press ALT + X and the green light will switch on. GC terminal is then ready for use. You can control the single components functioning by using special commands which are set in advance and can not be changed. You can control the components’ functioning by putting the command in the user’s part of working window (blue field) and pressing enter. The answer is “command name OK”. Example: request…… dvi response…...dvi OK
3.1 ALL COMMANDS AND CODES
3.1.1 COMMANDS AND CODES FOR KEYBOARD
COMMAND RESPONSE DESCRIPTION
BILL ACCEPTOR ALT 36 "777" bill ON ALT 31 "666" bill OFF
COIN ACCEPTOR ALT 40 "700" coin ON ALT 41 "701" coin OFF
HOPPER "702" zaseden z izplačilom ALT 80 "703" ni zaseden z izplačilom "704" hopper level < 10% ALT 81 "705" hopper level > 10%
ALT 82 "706" rest for pay-out "707" timeout ALT 83 "708" no timeout
ALT 84 "709" clear timeout ALT 85 "710" clear the rest of pay-out ALT 86 "711"+ <n> n=number of rest coins
![Page 125: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
ALT 65 "721" pay-out 1 coin ALT 66 "722" pay-out 2 coins ALT 67 "723" pay-out 4 coins ALT 68 "724" pay-out 8 coins ALT 69 "725" pay-out 16 coins ALT 70 "726" pay-out 32 coins ALT 71 "727" pay-out 64 coins ALT 72 "728" pay-out 128 coins
SEPARATOR ALT 87 "712" coin to cashbox ALT 88 "713" coin to hopper
BUZZER ALT 32 "888" buzzer OFF ALT 33 "999" buzzer ON
SEMAFOR ALT 50 "800" semafor OFF ALT 51 "801" semafor green OFF ALT 52 "802" semafor green slow ALT 53 "803" semafor green fast ALT 54 "804" semafor green ON ALT 55 "805" semafor red OFF ALT 56 "806" semafor red slow ALT 57 "807" semafor red fast ALT 58 "808" semafor red OFF
SMART KEY ALT 34 "FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF smart key is not inserted ALT 34 "smart key code smart key is inserted
OTHER COMMANDS ALT 35 number keyboard controller version ALT 30 all commands help start reset the keyboard controller
Table 2: Commands and codes for keyboard
![Page 126: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL EMULATOR
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
3.1.2 COMMANDS AND CODES FOR MAINBOARD
COMMAND RESPONSE DESCRIPTION
he help start reset mainboard ON power ON switch the main board ON OFF power OFF switch the main board OFF IZP <n> <n>=20..40 IZP OK blow out the ball HIT <n> <n>=1…8 HIT OK turning the plate HIT 0 HIT OK stop turning the plate DVI DVI OK eat the ball SW SW OFF or SW 1 2 5 7 test security switch RE delete clear security switck
0 ball is in status sensor ST 1 ball is not in status sensor
VER number mainboard version SN number MB serial number warm number temperature in the roulette INP <n> INP OK test IN counter OUT <n> OUT OK test OUT counter COU <n> COU OK test COU counter
Table 3: Commands and codes for mainboard
![Page 127: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 128: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
1.0 GC TERMINAL USAGE GC terminal is a program tool used to check gaming machine’s electronic parts proper functioning. Program opens by clicking the GC Terminal key in the Diag menu. That menu is located in the BiOS setup window.
Figure 1: GC Terminal program tool setup window
As seen in the figure above the program tool setup window is divided into three parts: 1st part; setting part 2nd and 3rd; user’s part As already mentioned the first part is a setup part. In that part the user can select certain preliminary settings of communication ports. First you need to select a successive number of COM ports, speed, etc.
![Page 129: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
COM PORT By clicking the drop select window the drop down list (figure 2) opens in which the COM port number is selected. The device of which functioning needs to be checked is connected to the COM port. If the windows embedded is used you must select the correct com port in commctrl part. See page ???.
Figure 2: COM port selection
When selecting COM ports you have to know to which COM port a certain device is connected. Single devices’ connection to COM ports in shown in the table below.
COM PORT COMPONENT’S NAME 2 Main board 5 Player position no. 1 6 Player position no. 2 7 Player position no. 3 8 Player position no. 4 9 Player position no. 5 10 Player position no. 6 11 Player position no. 7 12 Player position no. 8 13 Player position no. 9 14 Player position no. 10 15 wavecom modem 16 16 counters or cashless system
Table 1: Single components connection
The example shown in the table above is valid only for a certain gaming machine configuration.
![Page 130: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
PORT SPEED By clicking on the drop list the data transfer speed between two different elements is selected. Every given speed is offered in bytes/second.
Figure 2: transfer speed selection
START
By clicking the start key the program tool is ready for use. At that point the indicator turns green. In every case of the COM port’s or the speed’s change that key needs to be pressed so the indicator firstly turns red and then green.
SETTINGS
COM ports’ settings are shown here.
Single parts description: COM5; currently selected COM port 9600; data transfer speed between two selected devices n; parity byte 8; data byte 1; closing byte SENSOR TESTER A simplified demonstration of sensor tester is shown here. Using that element the customer support staff or any user can review the sensor circuit’s functioning.
![Page 131: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Crossbar: wheel’s crossbars are reviewed here Hole: wheel’s holes are reviewed here Zero: starting or zero position is reviewed here Reflection (Odboj): circumference sensor’s functioning is checked here For more precise testing of the sensor the program tool described in SENSOR TEST PROGRAM TOOL document is used. ECHO
ECHO is a setting used for the sent information review. In case echo is turned on the code used to perform certain operation is reviewed.
This part is used for select the correct COM port. If the multiplexer is installed we can select between next com ports: 30400, 30401, 30402, etc. If we don’t have the multiplexer we can select between 30200, 30500, 30600, 30700, etc.
Program tool’s second part contains all commands used for the gaming machine manager to check all electronic components functions.
Figure 3: Commands selection window
As seen in the figure above the selected window divides into three parts. Class: elements class Sub class: elements Function: elements function
![Page 132: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Single elements’ functioning check up is performed by selecting the element’s class then the element and then the function. A proper COM port and data transfer speed also needs to be selected. Single classes, sub classes and functions description: typical keyboard When testing that class functions COM ports between 5 and 14 need to be selected while the transfer speed needs to be 9600b/s. bepper/bepper on bepper is turned on by clicking that function bepper/bepper off bepper is turned off by clicking that function bill acceptor/bill acceptor on bills’ acceptation is enabled by clicking that function bill acceptor/bill acceptor off bills’ acceptation is disabled by clicking that function coin acceptor/coin acceptor on coins’ acceptation is enabled by clicking that function coin acceptor/coin acceptor off coins’ acceptation is disabled by clicking that function coin separator/coins to drop box tokens’ redirection to the drop box is enabled coins separator/coin to hopper tokens’ redirection to the hopper is enabled hopper/is busy checking if hopper is busy paying out or not hopper/level coins’ level in the hopper is checked hopper/remaining payout number of tokens to be paid out is checked
![Page 133: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
hopper/is in timeout checking if hopper is in timeout hopper/reset timeout timeout is reset hopper/reset remaining payout number of tokens to be paid out is reset hopper/stop payout tokens pay out is stopped hopper/pay x coins certain number of tokens is paid out signal lights/off signal light is turned off signal lights/green off signal light’s green light is turned off signal lights/green slow blinking signal light’s green light slow blinking is turned on signal lights/green fast blinking green light’s fast blinking is turned on signal lights/green on the green light is turned on signal lights/red off the red light is turned off signal lights/red slow blinking red light’s slow blinking is turned on signal lights/red fast blinking red light’s fast blinking is turned on signal lights/red on the red light is turned on
![Page 134: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
smart key/read key smart key’s functioning is checked. The smart key needs to be inserted. other functions/dip switches dip switches settings are checked other functions/help help menu of the previously selected keyboard is written out other functions/serial number keyboard serial number is written out other functions/version keyboard version is written out spanish keyboard Functions and their meanings are completely the same as the ones on the typical keyboard. keyboard leds Keyboard lights’ functioning can be tested using functions in that class. Buttons/show all; hide all; special all-red; etc. Selecting any of the functions mentioned above will turn on or off all of the keyboard led diodes. Besides that the diodes’ colours can be checked. num.display/d0=00000;d0=88888; etc. By selecting any of the functions mentioned above the 7-segments led displays functioning is checked. Progress bar/full BLACK; full RED; full BLUE; etc. By clicking any of the functions mentioned above progress bar functioning is checked. mainboard When testing functions of that class the COM2 COM port needs to be selected. Data transfer speed has to be 9600b/s. help/help all help functions are written out
![Page 135: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
version/version main board version is written out serial number/serial number main board serial number is written out temperature/temperature main board processor’s temperature is checked switch on-off main board switch on/switch off security switches/check security switches status safety switches status check up security switches/clear status safety switches status erasing counters on mainboard/test IN 10 INP counter state is increased for 10 counters on mainboard/test OUT 10 OUT counter state is increased for 10 counters on mainboard/test COU 10 COU counter state is increased for 10 motors When testing functions of that class the COM2 COM port needs to be selected. Data transfer speed has to be 9600b/s. blow out motor/blow out slow the ball is blown out with the speed 20 blow out motor/blow out medium the ball is blown out with the speed 40 blow out motor/blow out fast the ball is blown out with the speed 60 blow out motor/stop blowing out stops the blow out
![Page 136: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
plate motor/first speed the wheel turns with the first speed plate motor/second speed the wheel turns with the second speed plate motor/third speed the wheel turns with the third speed plate motor/fourth speed the wheel turns with the fourth speed plate motor/fifth speed the wheel turns with the fifth speed plate motor/sixth speed the wheel turns with the sixth speed plate motor/seventh speed the wheel turns with the seventh speed plate motor/eighth speed the wheel turns with the eighth speed plate motor/stop stops the wheel’s spinning rising motor/eat ball rises the motor sensor Check ball status/ball status The ball’s position is checked. In case the function returns the 0 value the ball is in starting position in other case the ball is on the wheel or somewhere in the blow out tube. additional counters Check all counters/test all counters By clicking that function the additional mechanical counters’ functioning is checked. It is crucial to select the proper COM port.
![Page 137: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
wavecom modem Check wavecom modem/check initialization not in use Check wavecom modem/send sms not in use
![Page 138: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC TERMINAL PROGRAM TOOL ver. 1.1.14
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
2.0 GC TERMINAL’S NAVIGATIONAL KEYS DESCRIPTION AND USE
Zero Spiel key stands for »tab« key of the PC keyboard. To focus on a selected function click that key.
Middle 2to1 key stands for »enter« key of the PC keyboard. To confirm a certain selection click that key.
By using the red/black and even/odd keys you can move through certain menus. COM ports number, data transfer speed, etc. can be selected using those keys.
![Page 139: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
CASHLESS SYSTEM
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 140: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 KASA DESCRIPTION AND USE.......................................................................................... 3
2.0 INSTALATION.................................................................................................................................. 3 2.1 KASA SETTINGS IN THE ROULETTE ........................................................................................ 3
2.1.1 DEMONSTRATION OF PARTICULAR SETTINGS IN THE SETTINGS DATABASE ......... 4 2.2 INSTALLATION AND SETTING OF THE RULETA CONSOLE PROGRAM TOOL ............ 4
2.2.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARTICULAR SEGMENTS IN THE SETTING WINDOW .................... 6 2.3 REVIEW OF THE BASIC COMMUNICATION COMMANDS BETWEEN KASA AND THE ROULETTE...................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.1 CREDITS PAYMENTS ................................................................................................................. 8 2.3.2 CREDITS PAY-OUTS ................................................................................................................... 9 2.3.3 STATEMENTS OF ACCOUNTS .................................................................................................. 9 2.3.4 INVOICES.................................................................................................................................... 10 2.3.5 FINANCES .................................................................................................................................. 11
3.0 KASA CONNECTION ( GERMAN VERSION ) ............................................................... 12 3.1 REGISTRATION AND USAGE OF SMART KEY...................................................................... 12
4.0 KASA CONNECTION (ENGLISH VERSION) ................................................................. 14 4.1 ENGLISH KASA SETTINGS IN THE ROULETTE.................................................................... 14 4.2 KASA SETTINGS (ENGLISH VERSION) .......................................................................................... 14
![Page 141: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 KASA DESCRIPTION AND USE Kasa is an additional option of the roulette. It consists of the central computer and the printer. The computer's role is to communicate with the roulette. The printer is used for printing payments, pay-outs, statements of accounts etc. To each kasa up to five single roulettes can be connected. Kasa's quality to enable each player to receive an invoice of his or her payments and pay-outs makes it a very useful program tool. Kasa also provides daily reviews of the payments and pay-outs referred to each of the roulettes.
Picture 1: Scheme of roulette and kasa connection 2.0 INSTALATION
2.1 KASA SETTINGS IN THE ROULETTE To set kasa into the roulette you need to contact the Gold Club Service authorized staff. For further information please contact us at: - [email protected] -telephone number: +386 57 311 562 You also have to provide us with information about the serial number of the roulette and the software version you use.
![Page 142: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.1.1 DEMONSTRATION OF PARTICULAR SETTINGS IN THE SETTINGS DATABASE
That also is in competence of the Gold Club Service staff. Fur further assistance please call our number: +386 57 311 562.
2.2 INSTALLATION AND SETTING OF THE RULETA CONSOLE PROGRAM TOOL
It takes a bit more of pretentiousness to place and set the RuletaConsole program tool in comparison to setting kasa into the roulette. More parameters need to be set. In order to make kasa operate correctly all of the parameters the program tool requires need to be set. At first the program tool Ruleta Console needs to be set into the RuletaConsole folder (picture no.2). Basicly there is only one folder ( Prazni ). Therefore two more have to be made: Arhiv and LOGx. For each new roulette attached to kasa a new LOG folder has to be made. The next step is to copy (and rename) the database of FinanceX.mdb, Fakture.mdb and Players.mdb from the Prazni folder. FinanceX.mdb databases are created for each roulette separately, whereas Fakture.mdb and Players.mdb are created collectively.
Picture 2: Demonstration of particular file settings When the required program tool is set, kasa and the roulette can be connected. As mentioned, up to five roulettes can be connected to one kasa, except for the German version. In the German version there is an additional GC cable contoller used to manage with smart keys connected to one of the COM ports so up to four roulettes can be connected to kasa. Demonstration of connecting kasa and the roulette with electric cable is shown in the picture no.3.
![Page 143: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Picture 3: Electric scheme of the cable used to connect kasa and the roulette Once the software is correctly set and kasa and the roulette are connected the program tool Ruleta Console can be run. The program demands the password. The initial password is “pop”. The password cannot be changed and it stands only for the basic kasa settings . Once the password is correctly written the setting window appears on the screen (picture no.4).
![Page 144: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Picture 4: Ruleta Console program tool's setting window
2.2.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARTICULAR SEGMENTS IN THE SETTING WINDOW
• Number of COM-s In this segment choose COM output to which a single roulette is connected. For example: if roulette 1 is connected to COM output 1 choose “COM1” and “Communication” instead of “None”. If printer is connected to COM output 1 choose “COM1” and “Printer” instead of “None”. If the smart key is connected to COM output 1 ( German kasa ) choose “COM1” and “Dallas” instead of “None”. See Picture no.4 above. The relation between COM outputs and actual kasa computer COM ports is:
Number of COM-s COM port on kasa computer COM outputs COM 1……………………………COM 1 COM 2……………………………COM 2 COM 3……………………………COM 5
![Page 145: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
COM 4……………………………COM 6 COM 5……………………………COM 7
• Main password Choose your own password which provides you with access to Ruleta Console program tool. • Finance password Choose your own password which provides you with access to finances. • Code keys and Money strings Slovene tolars: choose the currency and number of the key used for that currency ( inform GC service about that, because of roulette settings) Other: set to ~GPH and KEY.15 • Dallas Used only for the German version. • Kasa version Choose the used kasa version ( Normal, German, English ). • Min tolar credit Minimal credit payment. • Max credit Maximal credit payment. • Words to write The head of the invoice text. • Conversion tolar2credit Put in the credit/money proportion. Example: if you put in no.1 the proportion is 1:1 if you put in no.10 the proportion is 10 credits = 1 unit currency if you put in no. 0.1 the proportion is 10 unit currency = 1 credit • Conversion other2credit No changes are made here. • Write to facture Printer settings - all (printing payments and pay-outs) - only key out ( printing only pay-outs) • String language Choose the language in which you print (English, German, Slovene…) Once the settings are correctly set the Ruleta Console program tool can be run. As mentioned you need a password to access this area. Put in the password you have chosen in the segment “main password”. The program starts and you must first initiate it. You do so by pressing the button INIT or the combination ALT+I. The program is then connected to the roulette and recieves all data of the current credits condition at each player position. (picture no.5).
![Page 146: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Picture 5: The basic working window As seen in the picture the player's parameters are divided into two parts. The upper part enables credit payments and pay-outs referred to each player position whereas the lower part reviews the current credits condition at each of the players positions.
2.3 REVIEW OF THE BASIC COMMUNICATION COMMANDS BETWEEN KASA AND THE ROULETTE
2.3.1 CREDITS PAYMENTS
Put the amount of money you would like to pay in inside the blank space (picture no.6). Then choose the currency with ALT+S (for slovene tolars) or ALT+E (for euro). To pay in the amount, use keys F1-F10: F1 for player position no.1, F2 for player position no.2 etc. In addition to payments of the credits at kasa you can also use bill acceptor or smart key to pay in directly into the roulette.
![Page 147: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
Picture 6: Credits payment segment
2.3.2 CREDITS PAY-OUTS Pay-out of the credits is similar to the payments, only in the blank space you have to put in the number of credits you wish to pay out and press F1-F10, depending on the player position (picture no.7).
Picture 7: Credits pay-out segment
As seen on picture no.6 the amount of money that has been put into the blank space is transformed to credits by the tolar2credit proportion. It is the same with the pay-outs, only here the pay-outs are in credits which transform to money by the same proportion.
2.3.3 STATEMENTS OF ACCOUNTS
Statement of account is a result of all payments and pay-outs. It provides information about payments and pay-outs during the shift or during the day. When the shift or day is over the account is closed. You can access the account by pressing CTRL+Z. Statements of accounts are divided in two parts:
![Page 148: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
-X -Z X account is the one still in function and Z account is the closed one. You can close the account by clicking on it with the mouse and then pressing the 'statement of account' (obračun) button. You can also print both of the accounts (X and Z). X account can be printed by clicking on it and pressing the enter key. The statement of account window can be closed by pressing CTRL+Z.
Picture 8: Statement of account table
2.3.4 INVOICES
Invoices present all of the payments and pay-outs. The invoices window can be opened by pressing CTRL+F. Invoices can be very useful because of the fact that they provide review over all issued bills. You can print an invoice by clicking on it and then pressing the enter key. The invoices window can be closed by pressing CTRL+F.
![Page 149: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
Picture 9: Invoices table
2.3.5 FINANCES Kasa also provides you with review over the finances. You can access the finances by pressing CTRL+F. Put in the password you have chosen in the segment finance password. Finances provide all information about payments and pay-outs (picture no. 10). To clean up the current state of the finances press the button Erase Finance. The erased data is automatically saved in the archives. The window can be closed by pressing CTRL+F.
Picture 10: Finances table
![Page 150: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
3.0 KASA CONNECTION ( German version ) In contrast to normal version the connection of an additional GC cable controller is possible in German version in order to manage with smart keys. The basic connection is the same as in the normal version. To communicate with cable controller choose the word dallas instead of the word communication.
Picture 11: Kasa connection (German version)
3.1 REGISTRATION AND USAGE OF SMART KEY It is very simple to use the smart key. Once the program tool Ruleta Console is started and the smart key is plugged in, the settings window opens.
![Page 151: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 13
Picture 12: The setting of the smart key Description of the lines: • Code Smart key identity number which is different for each key. • Opis (description) The name of the key (can be changed by pressing the button change) • Credit The number of credits on each key. • Bonus The amount of money available to the player at an adequate number of credits. All of the payments and pay-outs on each key can be viewed by pressing the button view (picture no.13).
Picture 13: Review of payments and pay-outs on a single key
![Page 152: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION CASHLESS SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 14
4.0 KASA CONNECTION (English version) The English version operates in a slightly different way. The basis is the same as in normal as German version (PC, printer). The only difference is that the English version contains additional printers in the roulette besides the main printer and the CCD code reader. The additional printers are placed inside the roulette for each of the players positions. These printers are used by players to print their bills. The cashier uses these bills to check the CCD code. If the invoice is closed the money can be paid out.
Picture 14: Demonstration of connection of the English version
4.1 ENGLISH KASA SETTINGS IN THE ROULETTE
To set kasa into the roulette you need to contact the Gold Club Service authorized staff. For further assistance please call our number: +386 57 311 562.
4.2 KASA SETTINGS (English version) The setting itself is the same as the one in normal version. You only have to select English in the kasa version segment.
![Page 153: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
KEYBOARD CONTROLLER
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 154: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 2.0 KEYBOARD CIRCUIT COMMUNICATION..................................................................... 3
2.1 KEYBOARD AND PC COMMUNICATION .......................................................................................... 3 2.2 OTHER ELEMENTS COMMUNICATION................................................................................... 4
2.2.1 KEYBOARD AND SMART KEY COMMUNICATION............................................................... 4 2.2.2 KEYBOARD AND KEYBOARD FOIL COMMUNICATION ..................................................... 4 2.2.3 KEYBOARD AND BET BUTTON COMMUNICATION ............................................................ 4 2.2.4 KEYBOARD AND BILL ACCEPTOR COMMUNICATION ...................................................... 5 2.2.5 KEYBOARD AND COIN ACCEPTOR COMMUNICATION ..................................................... 5 2.2.6 KEYBOARD AND HOPPER COMMUNICATION ..................................................................... 5
3.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE SINGLE KEYBOARD CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS ............... 5 3.1 BET ..................................................................................................................................................... 6 3.2 KEY..................................................................................................................................................... 6 3.3 BILL/COIN ........................................................................................................................................ 7 3.4 HOPPER............................................................................................................................................. 7 3.5 COM.................................................................................................................................................... 8 3.6 JP 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.0 DIP SWITCH SETUP.............................................................................................................. 9
5.0 CODES AND COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD CONTROLLER .................................. 10 5.1 CODES FOR KEYBOARD CONTROLLER................................................................................ 10 5.2 COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD CONTROLLER ..................................................................... 11
![Page 155: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 KEYBOARD CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Keyboard circuit is one of the roulette’s main parts. It is used for the keyboard’s communication with other elements connected to it by the PC. The main part of the keyboard circuit is the processor used to process the signals sent from other components connected to the circuit. The additional elements are: the keyboard foil, the bet key, smart key, bill acceptor, coin acceptor and hopper. When any key is pressed the circuit sends certain codes which are fixed in advance to the PC. If the PC receives an undetermined code it will ignore it or simply register it. In a rough state the keyboard circuit consists of the processor, buzzer, dip switches and six RJ 45 connectors.
Picture1: The keyboard circuit physical demonstration 2.0 KEYBOARD CIRCUIT COMMUNICATION
2.1 KEYBOARD AND PC COMMUNICATION All of the keyboard circuit and PC communication is serial using the RS 232 protocol. For communication transfer the FTP cable is used. Physically the communication can be also transferred using the main board only because of the easier connection of the player positions. To communicate with the single keyboards the PC uses ten communicational ports- from COM5 to COM14.
![Page 156: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
Picture 2: Keyboard circuit communication
2.2 OTHER ELEMENTS COMMUNICATION Keyboard circuit enables communication with other elements connected to the circuit.
2.2.1 KEYBOARD AND SMART KEY COMMUNICATION This communication starts with the demand for the microcontroller to check the smart key’s code. When the code is checked it is transferred to PC using the COM port. In case the key is not put in the demand is sent again. The demand keeps on being sent until the key is put in or until there is no need to check the code.
2.2.2 KEYBOARD AND KEYBOARD FOIL COMMUNICATION In this case the microcontroller is constantly checking if any key is pressed. When a certain key is pressed, the received signals are first processed and then transferred to PC using the COM port. The new checking starts as soon as the last pressed key is released.
2.2.3 KEYBOARD AND BET BUTTON COMMUNICATION The bet key functioning is the same as the one of any other key so the communication is the same as with any other key on the keyboard.
![Page 157: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
2.2.4 KEYBOARD AND BILL ACCEPTOR COMMUNICATION This is a two way communication because the microcontroller first passes a demand for bill acceptor’s functioning. When the bill is entered into the bill acceptor the bill acceptor first checks it out. In case the bill is OK the bill acceptor sends impulses of certain length to the keyboard circuit. The impulse length should be 50 ms. When the bill acceptor sends the impulses to the keyboard circuit the impulses are then transformed to codes using the code table. These codes are then sent to PC using the communication channel. In case the communication through the COM port collapses accepting of bills is impossible.
2.2.5 KEYBOARD AND COIN ACCEPTOR COMMUNICATION The communication is the same as the one with the bill acceptor because the coin acceptor is similar to the bill acceptor. The only difference is that coin acceptor accepts coins instead of bills.
2.2.6 KEYBOARD AND HOPPER COMMUNICATION The keyboard circuit commands the hopper to pay out the coins or tokens. Besides that it also checks the level of coins, the hopper’s business with payouts etc. To pay out a certain number of coins the keyboard circuit sends to the hopper a certain number of impulses. Processor sends the command to pay out the first two tokens to the hopper. When the hopper sends its confirmation (ACK) about the first token has been pay out, the processor sends another command to pay out the second token. After the second confirmation (ACK) from the hopper the processor sends the third command to pay out the third token and so on. 3.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE SINGLE KEYBOARD CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS As seen on figure 1 the keyboard circuit has quite a few connectors. Only the most quality connectors are used- RJ 45. Besides the connectors the keyboard circuit also uses DIP switch to set some of the bill acceptor, coin acceptor, signal light, hopper, etc. functions. Setting and purpose of single connectors is shown on the figure below.
![Page 158: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Picture 3: The keyboard circuit connectors
3.1 BET On that connector the bet key is connected. The bet key is used to raise the bets. With the bet key the player can raise the number of credits on a certain number, colour, etc. The bet key is connected to the keyboard circuit with the bet cable.
Picture 4: BET cable
3.2 KEY The key reader for the smart key is connected through that connector. The smart key has many purposes: - to set the roulette function
![Page 159: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
- to review the finances - to pay in and pay out - to review the statistic - to stop the roulette To each key some certain privileges can be determined. Do that using the Priviledge editor. The key reader is connected to the keyboard circuit with the smart key cable.
Picture 5: SMART KEY cable
3.3 BILL/COIN The bill and coin readers are connected using that connector. The readers enable the player to pay in a certain amount of money which is then converted to credit. Because the roulette is built in a way in which it can use readers from different manufacturers it is essential to set the DIP switches correctly to enable the readers to function properly.
3.4 HOPPER The hopper is connected using that connector. The hopper is used to pay out the coins. Gold Club roulettes use the MK 4 hopper. Hopper is connected to the keyboard circuit with the hopper cable.
![Page 160: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Picture 6: HOPPER cable
3.5 COM Through that connector the main communication of the keyboard circuit is done. All of the data between the keyboard circuit and PC is transferred here. Communication is done using the communication cable.
Picture 7: The cable used for the main board and the keyboard circuit communication
![Page 161: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
3.6 JP 1
Security switches are connected using that connector. Security switches are used to prevent the door or the cash boxes to open. In case the port opens the security switch activates and the roulette stops. Security switches are connected to the keyboard circuit with the cable shown on the figure below.
Picture 8: security switch connection
4.0 DIP SWITCH SETUP The proper functioning of single components connected to the keyboard circuit is set by using DIP switches. The DIP switch is basically a mechanical switch in which eight switches are implemented. .
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Picture 9: DIP switches demonstration
Single DIP switch purpose: • DIP switch no. 1: set to OFF ( currently inactive )
![Page 162: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
• DIP switch no. 2: set to OFF ( currently inactive ) • DIP switch no. 3: set to OFF ( currently inactive ) • DIP switch no. 4: set to OFF ( currently inactive) • DIP switch no. 5: ON…… activates functioning of GBA, JCM 03 bill acceptors and coin acceptors OFF…...inactivates the elements mentioned above • DIP switch no.6: ON…… activates the functioning of JCM 11, JCM 12, WBA 25 bill acceptors and coin acceptors OFF….. inactivates the elements mentioned above • DIP switch no. 7: ON…… activates the functioning of the hopper OFF…...inactivates the functioning of the hopper • DIP switch no. 8: set to OFF ( currently inactive ) In case of using the combination of bill and coin acceptors the next DIP switches have to be set to ON: • coin acceptor in combination with GBA or JCM 03 bill acceptors ON…… DIP switch no. 5 to activate bill acceptors and coin acceptors ON…… DIP switch no. 7 to activate the hoppers OFF ….. the rest of the DIP switches • coin acceptor in combination with JCM 11, JCM 12 and WBA 25 bill acceptors ON…… DIP switch no. 6 to activate bill acceptors in coin acceptors ON…… DIP switch no. 7 to activate the hoppers 5.0 CODES AND COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD CONTROLLER As mentioned above the keyboard consists of foil in which there are keys used to select bets or erase bets, etc. Each of the keys has its own code for PC to know which key has been pressed. The ID codes can be checked in the Power terminal program tool. Also by using Power terminal program tool elements which are connected to the keyboard circuit can be checked - using special commands. That elements are bill acceptors, coin acceptors, hoppers, etc..
5.1 CODES FOR KEYBOARD CONTROLLER Key codes which are implemented in the foil are shown in the figure below.
![Page 163: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
184 16 28 15 30 17 31 18 32 19 33 20 40 27 39 26 37 24 38 25 36 23 34 21 35 22
185 42 54 41 56 43 57 44 58 45 59 46 66 53 65 52 63 50 64 51 62 49 60 47 61
81 68 80 67 82 69 83 70 84 71 85 72 92 79 91 78 89 76 90 77 88 75 86 73 87 74
186 94 106 93 108 95 109 96 110 97 111 98 118 105 117 104 115 102 116 103 114 101 112 99 113
187 183 132 119 134 121 135 122 136 123 137 124 144 131 143 130 141 128 142 129 140 127 138 125 139 126
146 158 145 160 147 161 148 162 149 163 150 170 157 169 156 167 154 168 155 166 153 164 151 165
159 173 120 179 152
172 171 174 176 182 181 177 178
100
NeighboursZero spielClost to zeroOrphansSerie 5/8Bet
------
294855107133188
Picture 10: Codes and buttons
5.2 COMMANDS FOR KEYBOARD CONTROLLER
1.1 CODES FOR KEYBOARD CONTROLLER The commands used to check the keyboard circuit functioning and functioning of other elements connected to the keyboard circuit are shown in the table below. Use the Power terminal program tool to check the functioning.
COMMAND RESPONSE DESCRIPTION
BIILL ACCEPTOR ALT 36 "777" bill ON ALT 31 "666" bill OFF
COIN ACCEPTOR ALT 40 "700" coin ON ALT 41 "701" coin OFF
HOPPER "702" busy for payout ALT 80 "703" not busy for payout
![Page 164: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION KEYBOARD CONTROLLER VER.: 1.9
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
"704" hopper level < 10% ALT 81 "705" hopper level > 10%
ALT 82 "706" rest for pay-out "707" timeout ALT 83 "708" no timeout
ALT 84 "709" clear timeout ALT 85 "710" clear the rest of pay-out ALT 86 "711"+ <n> n=number of rest coins ALT 65 "721" pay-out 1 coin ALT 66 "722" pay-out 2 coins ALT 67 "723" pay-out 4 coins ALT 68 "724" pay-out 8 coins ALT 69 "725" pay-out 16 coins ALT 70 "726" pay-out 32 coins ALT 71 "727" pay-out 64 coins ALT 72 "728" pay-out 128 coins
SEPARATOR ALT 87 "712" coin to cashbox ALT 88 "713" coin to hopper
BUZZER ALT 32 "888" buzzer OFF ALT 33 "999" buzzer ON
SEMAFOR ALT 50 "800" semafor OFF ALT 51 "801" semafor green OFF ALT 52 "802" semafor green slow ALT 53 "803" semafor green fast ALT 54 "804" semafor green ON ALT 55 "805" semafor red OFF ALT 56 "806" semafor red slow ALT 57 "807" semafor red fast ALT 58 "808" semafor red OFF
SMART KEY ALT 34 "FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF smart key is not inserted ALT 34 "smart key code smart key is inserted
OTHER COMMANDS ALT 35 number keyboard controller version ALT 30 all commands help start reset the keyboard controller
Table 1: All commands for keyboard
![Page 165: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
MAIN BOARD
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 166: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 MAIN BOARD DESCRIPTION............................................................................................. 3
2.0 MAIN BOARD COMMUNICATION.................................................................................... 4 2.1 MAIN BOARD AND PC COMMUNICATION .............................................................................. 4 2.2 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MAIN BOARD AND OTHER ELEMENTS.......................... 5
2.2.1 MAIN BOARD AND SENSOR COMMUNICATION.................................................................. 5 2.2.2 MAIN BOARD AND STATUS COMMUNICATION .................................................................. 5 2.2.3 MAIN BOARD AND POWER BOX COMMUNICATION .......................................................... 6 2.2.4 MAIN BOARD AND INVERTER COMMUNICATION ............................................................. 6 2.2.5 MAIN BOARD AND MECHANICAL COUNTERS COMMUNICATION ( 3 COUNTERS )... 6 2.2.6 MAIN BOARD AND KEYBOARD CIRCUIT COMMUNICATION .......................................... 6
3.0 SINGLE MAIN BOARD CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION ............................................... 7 3.1 SENSOR ............................................................................................................................................. 7 3.2 COM 2 ................................................................................................................................................. 8 3.3 AUX..................................................................................................................................................... 8 3.4 STATUS .............................................................................................................................................. 9 3.5 POWER .............................................................................................................................................. 9 3.6 INVERTER ...................................................................................................................................... 10 3.7 UPS.................................................................................................................................................... 10 3.8 FEED LINE ...................................................................................................................................... 11 3.9 COUNTERS ..................................................................................................................................... 11 3.10 1-4 AND 5-8....................................................................................................................................... 11 3.11 PS 1- PS 8 .......................................................................................................................................... 12 3.12 JP 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.13 JP 7 ................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.14 LED INDICATORS ......................................................................................................................... 13
4.0 MAIN BOARD COMMANDS.............................................................................................. 14
![Page 167: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 MAIN BOARD DESCRIPTION Main board is a part of every single roulette. It is used as connector between the PC and other components of the roulette (inverter, keyboard circuit, sensor, etc.). Its main purpose is to control the functioning of single roulette's components. Besides that it also controls the roulette's temperature. As the computer the main board is also unique this means that it cannot be replaced if malfunction appears without the Gold Club knowledge. Communication between the PC and roulette's components always run through the main board. Communication between the main board and PC and communication between the main board and the keyboard circuits is serial while other communication is impulsed.
Picture1: Main board circuit
![Page 168: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.0 MAIN BOARD COMMUNICATION The main board enables two ways of communication, the serial and impulsed one. The serial communication is used to communicate between the main board and PC and the main board and the keyboard circuit. Other roulette components communicate with the main board using impulsed communication. Serial communication:
from to mainboard ↔ computermainboard ↔ keyboard
Table 1: Serial communication demonstration
Impulsed communication:
from to mainboard → sensor mainboard → status mainboard → power boxmainboard → inverter
Table 2: Impulsed communication demonstration
2.1 MAIN BOARD AND PC COMMUNICATION As mentioned before the main board is a connector between the PC and other roulette's elements. Because of that between the PC and the main board a certain information is transferred which enables single roulette's elements to function correctly. Data transfer and control is demonstrated in the figure below.
![Page 169: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Picture 2: Data transfer between the Main board and other components As seen in the figure above on the highest position in the system there is the PC. The PC controls the roulette's functioning in whole. Right below the PC there is the main board which controls the power box, inverter, basic counters and security switches. On the lowest position there are elements used to pay in or pay out the money or credit. Also seen on the figure is the communication between the single layers. All of the connection between the main board and PC and the main board and keyboard circuit is serial while other is impulsed. The main board and PC communication runs through COM 2 communicational port by RS 232 protocol.
2.2 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MAIN BOARD AND OTHER ELEMENTS As the main board is the connector between the PC and other electronic components it is used as a mediator of certain information. Most of the communication between the main board and other components is impulsed.
2.2.1 MAIN BOARD AND SENSOR COMMUNICATION This communication is impulsed and direct. As a result the sensor is constantly sending data about the wheel’s state to the main board. The sensor is in fact sending information about crossbars, holes and the zero. Using that data the PC can determine the ball's correct location.
2.2.2 MAIN BOARD AND STATUS COMMUNICATION This communication is also impulsed. Status is sending data about the ball's condition to the main board. In fact the status sensor is an element in which the ball is in its starting position. Using that data the PC can determine in what part of the roulette is the ball.
![Page 170: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
2.2.3 MAIN BOARD AND POWER BOX COMMUNICATION Power box is in fact the main board’s slave. It follows the main board's orders. These orders refer to switching on the IZP motor, DVI motor, etc. The orders are analogous and impulsed
2.2.4 MAIN BOARD AND INVERTER COMMUNICATION Inverter is used to navigate the main motor. The main motor changes the motor's speed using the frequency change. The communication with the inverter is very similar to the one with the power box. Here the main board sends its order in a 4 bit shape, the inverter then navigates the three phase main motor. This connection is also a direct one.
2.2.5 MAIN BOARD AND MECHANICAL COUNTERS COMMUNICATION ( 3 COUNTERS )
Using this connection the mechanical counters function is enabled. Mechanical counters are used to count certain parameters (INPUT, OUTPUT, GAME, etc.). They function through impulses sent from the main board. All of these impulses are rectangular.
2.2.6 MAIN BOARD AND KEYBOARD CIRCUIT COMMUNICATION That communication is serial using the RS 232 protocol. To transfer the FTP cable is used.
![Page 171: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
3.0 SINGLE MAIN BOARD CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION On the main board there are quite a big number of connectors. The connectors are used to charge the main board and also to communicate with other components of the automatic roulette. All of the communication connectors are high quality connectors.
Picture 3: The main circuit connection scheme
3.1 SENSOR Sensor which is used to read the certain parameters is connected to that connector. Using of the sensor enables the roulette to determine on what number the ball has fallen and what is current position of the wheel. Connection is made by SENSOR cable.
![Page 172: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Picture 4: SENSOR cable
3.2 COM 2 The main connection between the main board and PC runs through that connector. The communication is serial and it runs through the COM 2 cable (figure 5).
Picture 5: COM 2 cable
3.3 AUX That connector is used to connect certain external units (circuit which enables the connection of 16 safety switches) but it is currently not in use.
![Page 173: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
3.4 STATUS The status sensor is connected to that connector. Its main purpose is to read the ball. It provides the roulette with the information whether the ball is in the start position or not. The main circuit and the status sensor are connected with the STATUS cable.
Picture 6: Status cable
3.5 POWER Using that connector certain commands are performed. These commands indirectly control the power box proper functioning and directly navigate two motors:
- Lifting motor - Ejecting motor
Power box is connected to the main board with the POWER cable.
Picture 7: Power cable
![Page 174: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
3.6 INVERTER Inverter is connected using that connector. Inverter is a device used to navigate the wheel motor’s speed by changing the frequency. The motor’s speed is used to spin the wheel. The main board and the inverter are connected with the inverter cable.
Picture 8: Inverter cable
3.7 UPS On that connector UPS is connected. UPS is a battery which provides the main plate with a constant source of power. In case of power breakdown the roulette has to function perfectly for at least a while. If the main board is not connected to a constant source of voltage the roulette isn’t functioning. The diode of LED UPS signal is reminding to connect the UPS to the main board. The important thing is that the safety switches remain active if the main board is connected to UPS even if the charging stops.
Picture 9: UPS cable
![Page 175: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
3.8 FEED LINE
Through that connector the main board is charged. The main board uses +5V and +12V direct current.
3.9 COUNTERS Three mechanical counters are connected here. These counters are part of the basic configuration of the roulette which means they are part of every roulette. The three counters can be used to count different parameters:
- IN all - OUT all - BET all - WIN all - GAME
Demonstration of the three counters connection is shown in the figure below.
Picture10: Three counters connection
3.10 1-4 AND 5-8 Communication between the keyboard circuit and PC runs though these two connectors. As seen on the figure below up to four keyboards can be connected to PC using the connector 1-4 or the connector 5-8.
![Page 176: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
Picture 11: Multicom cable
3.11 PS 1- PS 8 These connectors are used to connect the single keyboard circuits. Keyboard circuit are connected to the main board with the communicational cable (figure 12).
Picture 12: Communicational cable used to connect the main board with the keyboard circuits
Because there are eight equal connectors on the main board up to eight keyboard circuits can be connected to the main board- that also means up to eight player positions can be connected to the main board. In case the roulette has more than eight player positions two of them need to be connected directly to PC.
![Page 177: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 13
3.12 JP 1
On that connector the cupola safety switches are connected. Because cupola has two safety switches that are left and right, the left safety switch is connected to the first contact (S5 A in S5 B) the right safety switch is connected to the third contact (S7 A in S7 B). On the roulette type SX the cash box is connected to the second contact (S6 A in S6 B). In case the second contact is not in use the jumper must be set. On the S8 A contact the tilt sensor is connected. On this contact the impulse has to be inverted (active when in contact).
3.13 JP 7
That connector is used to set the constant charging of the main board. As seen in the figure that connector has three pins. If on the first two contacts the jumper is connected the main board uses UPS to charge. In case the jumper is connected to the second and the third contact the main board doesn’t use the source of constant voltage but
it charges from the power supply.
3.14 LED INDICATORS LED UPS The flashing led diode is showing the main board and UPS connection. In case the led diode is flashing quickly the main board is charging from the power supply. In case of slow flashing it charges from UPS. LED STATUS If the diode is switched on the ball is in the start position. In case the diode is switched off the ball is not in the start position (it is in the tube or on the wheel). LED START In case the sensor functions correctly the diode is flashing. Its flashing shows the zero’s passing by the sensor. LED CROSSBAR The diode is showing the crossbars on the plate. If the plate spins the diode has to flash. LED HOLE The diode is showing holes on the plate. If the plate spins the diode has to flash. LED Vcc1 The diode is switched on in case of +12 V direct current used to charge the main board. LED Vcc2 The diode is switched on in case of +5V direct current used to charge the main board.
![Page 178: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MAIN BOARD VER.: 1.0.22
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 14
4.0 MAIN BOARD COMMANDS Some of the commands used to control the functioning of certain electronic components are shown in the table below. The functioning can be checked by using the power terminal. Settings: Com ports: COM2 Speed: 9600 bit/s
COMMAND RESPONSE DESCRIPTION
he help start reset mainboard ON power ON switch the main board ON OFF power OFF switch the main board OFF IZP <n> <n>=20..40 IZP OK blow out the ball HIT <n> <n>=1…8 HIT OK turning the plate HIT 0 HIT OK stop turning the plate DVI DVI OK eat the ball SW SW OFF or SW 1 2 5 7 test security switch RE delete clear security switch
0 ball is in status sensor ST 1 ball is not in status sensor
VER number mainboard version SN number MB serial number warm number temperature in the roulette INP <n> INP OK test IN counter OUT <n> OUT OK test OUT counter COU <n> COU OK test COU counter
Table 3: All commands for main board
![Page 179: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
MECHANICAL METERS
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 180: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENTS
1.0 ELECTROMECHANICAL COUNTERS DESCRIPTION ................................................ 3 1.1 THREE COUNTERS......................................................................................................................... 3 1.2 SIXTEEN COUNTERS ..................................................................................................................... 4 1.3 EXTENSION ...................................................................................................................................... 5
2.0 ELECTROMECHANICAL COUNTERS SETUP ............................................................... 6 2.1 THREE COUNTERS CONNECTION ............................................................................................ 6 2.2 SIXTEEN COUNTERS CONNECTION ......................................................................................... 7 2.3 SIXTEEN COUNTERS AND EXTENSION CONNECTION ....................................................... 8
3.0 MECHANICAL. XML FILE SETTINGS ........................................................................... 10
![Page 181: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 ELECTROMECHANICAL COUNTERS DESCRIPTION GC roulettes use electromechanical counters as external units which count payments, payouts, number of games, etc. In basis every roulette has three counters. Beside these basic counters additional counters can be installed. Mostly this means additional sixteen counters. If sixteen additional counters is too few you can add sixteen more. We call that counters extension.
1.1 THREE COUNTERS As mentioned before there are three counters installed in every roulette. They are used mostly for counting payments and payouts on a single roulette. Besides that they are used to count the amount of payed money, the amount of earned money and the number of the games played on the roulette. Single counting definitions: • IN (input) it counts all of the payments ( bill IN, key IN, itd ) • OUT (output) it counts all of the payouts ( bill OUT, key OUT, itd ) • COU (counters) it counts the money paid through the BILL acceptors or games played • BET ALL it counts the amount of the gambled money • WIN ALL it counts the amount of the earned money • GAME ALL it counts all of the games. The game starts when at least one player position has bet a certain amount of money. The example of three counters is shown on the picture below.
![Page 182: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
Picture 1: The three counters
1.2 SIXTEEN COUNTERS You can use the 16 counters to count certain parameters on single player positions. 16 counters function exactly the same as three counters except the 16 counters need to be plugged in a direct current and to a constant source of the direct current (UPS). The configuration of the counters can be done by your choice. In this case the settings in the Mechanical XML file need to be changed. You can do that using the accompanied programme. Single counting definitions: • IN 1 (input 1) it counts all of the payments on the first player position • OUT 1 (output 1) it counts all of the payouts on the first player position • BET 1 it counts the amount of the gambled money on the first player position • WIN 1 it counts the amount of the earned money on the first player position • GAME 1 it counts the games on the first player position. The game starts when at the first player position a certain amount of money had been bet.
![Page 183: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Picture 2: The 16 counters circuit
1.3 EXTENSION An extension is only the expansion of the 16 counters with additional sixteen counters more. So thirty two counters are available. This is used mostly on the multi- player position roulettes. Example: On the roulette with ten player positions you want to have counters to count BET, WIN and GAME for each of the player positions. You need three counters for each player position which makes thirty counters. So 16 counters is not enough- you need an extension which gives you thirty two counters.
![Page 184: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Picture 3: Counters extension
2.0 ELECTROMECHANICAL COUNTERS SETUP The setup is quite simple. Besides the setup some of the parameters need to be set (not for the three counters). Unless the settings are manufactured you need to contact the Gold Club costumer support. You can reach them by phone on +386 5 731 1562 or by email on [email protected]. You need to send them the information about the software version and the COM ports on which the 16 counters will be connected. In case you have the latest software version (1148) you can set some of the settings by yourself. Change the settings in the Mechanical.XML file or use the accompanied programme. In case of any problems contact GC costumers support.
2.1 THREE COUNTERS CONNECTION They are connected directly to the main board which means no additional settings are required. Just plug them in the main board junction.
![Page 185: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
Picture 4: Electric scheme of the three counters setup
2.2 SIXTEEN COUNTERS CONNECTION These counters need to be connected with the first free COM ports on the PC and to the direct current of +12 V and + 5V. Because the counters also need to function in a case of an electric circuit cut out they need to be connected to a constant source of direct current (UPS). The counters also need to be initialized. To do that you need to contact the Gold Club authorized staff on the number: + 386 5 731 1562. In case the roulette has the latest software version you can initialize the counters using the accompanied programme.
![Page 186: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Picture 5: Electric scheme of the 16 counters setup
2.3 SIXTEEN COUNTERS AND EXTENSION CONNECTION It is quite simple to connect the additional counters. If the 16 counters have already been connected all you need to add is an extension. Use the accompanied cable ( 1/1 flat cable ). Besides the connection you need to set the additional 16 counters settings using the accompanied programme.
![Page 187: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
Picture 6: Scheme of 16 counters and extension connection
![Page 188: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
3.0 MECHANICAL. XML FILE SETTINGS The description of particular setting fields: <param name=”BETAll”> Mechanical setting <comm>0</comm> <command>INP</command> <factor>1</factor> <index>0</index> <meter>2</meter> <player>255</player> </param>
• Param name: the name of the counter (by your choice) • Comm: put in the COM port on which the counters are connected ( put in 0 for three
counters, 16 counters depending on the roulette)
STAR SX UFO GALAXY COM PORT 10 or 11 11 or 12 14 or 15 15 or 16
Table 1: Comm port settings
• Command: put in the command for counter function (INP, OUT, COU, INA etc.) • Factor: put in the counting proportion
1 2 3 4
1/1 1/10 1/100 1/1000
Table 2: Factor settings
• Index: a particular setting ( start with 0,1,2,3,4,5, etc.) • Meter: counter function
BET WIN GAME IN OUT
2 1 4 1048800 2098944
Table 3: Meter settings
• Player:
For three basic counters
![Page 189: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MECHANICAL METERS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
INAll, BETAll, OUTAll and WINAll put in 2X -1 (x=number of playpositions) GAMAll put in 2X (x=number of playpositions)
STAR SIX UFO GALAXY INAll 31 63 255 1023 OUTAll 31 63 255 1023 BETAll 31 63 255 1023 WINAll 31 63 255 1023 GAMEAll 32 64 256 1024
Table 4: Player settings
For “16 counters” Player position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Player 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512
Table 5: Player settings For GAMEAll settings you must look the number of player stations in PC register. The way is: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE→SOFTWARE→Ruleta→Temp
![Page 190: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
mModification of DVI motor Modification of lifting motor (DVI motor) helps to prevent failure of DVI relay in power box. Gold Club uses two almost identical versions of DVI motors. Document helps you to modificate both. You have to do 3 cuts, 2 bridges (wire connections) and put additional diode. Cuts are marked red, bridges are marked yellow and diode position and orientation is marked with blue color. Additional diode can be any sillicon diode (1N4148, BA…, 1N400x, …), we use 1N4004 SMD diode. In case of dvi relay failure in power box, first change damaged DVI relay and than do the modification. This modification is already done on roulettes manufactured after august 2003.
![Page 191: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
![Page 192: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
MULTIPLEXER
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 193: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENTS 1.0 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MUX AND THE GAMBLING DEVICE OR BETWEEN THE MUX AND THE EXTERNAL PC ........................................................................ 4
2.1 THE ROLE OF MUX IN ROULETTE............................................................................................... 4 2.1.1 CONNECTING THE MULTIPLEXER .......................................................................................... 5
2.2 THE ROLE OF MUX IN THE ON_LINE SYSTEM ........................................................................ 8 2.2.1 CONNECTING THE MULTIPLEXER IN THE ON-LINE SYSTEM ................................................ 9
3.0 MULTIPLEXER CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................... 11 3.1 IN1-IN5................................................................................................................................................. 11 3.2 OUT ...................................................................................................................................................... 12 3.3 OUT USB.............................................................................................................................................. 12 3.4 X1 .......................................................................................................................................................... 12 3.5 FEED LINE.......................................................................................................................................... 12 3.6 X2 .......................................................................................................................................................... 13 3.7 X3 .......................................................................................................................................................... 13
4.0 DIP – SWITCH SETTING.................................................................................................... 13
5.0 SOFTWARE SETTING OF THE MULTIPLEXER.......................................................... 15
![Page 194: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 DESCRIPTION A multiplexer is a device which enables us to transmit a large number of information signals via a small number of lines or channels. It is used wherever the number of lines does not equal the number of outputs. Multiplexers are classified into several groups:
- multiplexer 4/1 - multiplexer 8/1 - multiplexer 16/1 - multiplexer 20/1
The name multiplexer 4/1 means that all four inputs/outputs can be reduced to a single input/output.
Figure 1: Multiplexer 4/1
![Page 195: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.0 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MUX AND THE GAMBLING DEVICE OR BETWEEN THE MUX AND THE EXTERNAL PC Between all elements, i.e. between the multiplexer and gambling devices and also between the multiplexer and the additional interfaces, there is serial, bidirectional communication. RS 232 communication protocol is used. In addition to asynchronous serial communication, communication via the USB can be used as well.
Figure 2: The communication principle of the multiplexer with other components
2.1 THE ROLE OF MUX IN ROULETTE Here, the multiplexer replaces the communication cards used for communication between the individual gambling spots (keyboard controller) and the computer. The communication between the multiplexer and the computer is either serial ( RS232 ) or via USB. Packages of certain lengths are transmitted (Figure 5). Unlike the communication in the ON_LINE system, the data block here is 8-bit, not 9-bit, because the wake up bit is not needed.
![Page 196: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Figure 3: Connecting the MUX in the gambling device
2.1.1 CONNECTING THE MULTIPLEXER In this system the multiplexer replaces the communication cards. Connection of the individual keyboards to the main board is exactly the same as the previous connection and will not be changed. What changes in this system is that the connectors 1-4 and 5-8 on the main board need to be connected to the first two input connectors of the multiplexer, that is, connectors 1-4 and 5-8.
2.1.1.1 CONNECTION VIA COM PORT
The multiplexer can be connected two ways: via the com port or via the USB. The figure below shows the connection of the multiplexer via the com port.
![Page 197: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Figure 4: Presentation of multiplexer connection via COM port To connect both elements use the MUX-PC communication cable, which is shown in Figure 5 below.
Figure 5: PC-MUX communication cable In addition to the connection between the multiplexer and the computer, a connection between the multiplexer and the main board of the gambling device is needed as well. The devices are connected with the Main Board – MUX communication cable, shown in Figure 6 below.
![Page 198: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
Figure 6: Main Board-Multiplexer communication cable
2.2.1.2 CONNECTION VIA USB PORT In addition to the COM port connection, the multiplexer can be connected also via the USB. This type of connection is shown in the figure below.
Figure 7: Presentation of the multiplexer connection via the USB
![Page 199: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
2.2 THE ROLE OF MUX IN THE ON_LINE SYSTEM One of the possible uses of the multiplexer is in the ON_LINE system. Currently, the multiplexer is used in the SAS ON_LINE system. With this protocol the ON_LINE server asks the gambling device for certain information and the gambling device transmits the replies to the questions asked. In the event that the gambling device does not reply, the ON_LINE server sends the command again. If the gambling device does not transmit the answer after the third attempt, a system error will occur.
Figure 8: Communication principle between the gambling device and the ON_LINE server Detailed description of the communication protocol: The multiplexer receives certain data in the form of packages from the external devices. These packages are 9-bit, with 8 data bits and 1 wake up bit.
Figure 9: Presentation of the data block
![Page 200: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
The data the multiplexer receives from the gambling machine are somewhat different in form. Here the multiplexer receives the packages of certain lengths, but the structure of the packages is a little different. Each package consists of three parts: - head of the package - address - data The principle of the package structure is shown in the figure below.
Figure 10: Presentation of a package sent to MUX by the gambling device (roulette)
2.2.1 CONNECTING THE MULTIPLEXER IN THE ON-LINE SYSTEM Connecting the multiplexer in the ON-LINE system is somewhat different. In this case two multiplexers have to be used, the first one to connect the individual gambling spots of the device and the other to connect the interfaces of the ON-LINE system. The connection is shown in the figure below.
Figure 11: Presentation of multiplexer connection in the SAS ON-LINE system In this system the cables used to connect the first multiplexer and the main board, and the multiplexer and the computer, are the same as those for connection via the COM port. The
![Page 201: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
new cable in this case is the one that connects the second multiplexer and the interfaces for the SAS ON-LINE system, which is shown in the figure below.
Figure 12: Connecting cable between the multiplexer and the interfaces of the SAS system
![Page 202: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
3.0 MULTIPLEXER CONNECTIONS As mentioned in the introduction, 20 devices can be connected to the multiplexer, which means that it has 20 input channels. The number of channels is limited with the speed of data transfer, i.e. the higher the speed, the lower the number of the channels used. In addition to the data transfer connections the multiplexer also needs one-way electrical supply with voltage between +7V and + 30V.
Figure 13: Multiplexer connections
3.1 IN1-IN5 Termination connectors IN1-IN5 are used to connect certain input units. The input units can either be the individual roulette gambling spots or special interfaces between the MUX and the ON_LINE server in cases where the multiplexer is used as an element of the ON_LINE system. Up to »four« external devices can be connected to the individual connectors. To connect the elements mentioned, use the cable shown in Figure 6 if you are connecting individual gambling spots, or the cable shown in Figure 9 if you are connecting the interfaces of the ON-LINE system.
![Page 203: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
3.2 OUT Communication between the MUX and the gambling device (usually an electronic roulette) is carried out via this termination connector. The devices are connected via the MUX communication cable.
Figure 14: Connecting cable between the MUX and the electronic roulette
3.3 OUT USB This connection enables communication between the multiplexer and the electronic roulette via the USB.
3.4 X1 A programming device for processor programming is connected via this connection. 3.5 FEED LINE
Here the power supply of the multiplexer is connected. In order to operate, the MUX needs +7V to +30V of the one-way electrical supply voltage.
![Page 204: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 13
Figure 15: Connecting the multiplexer power supply
3.6 X2 A bridge is inserted onto this termination bar when you want to connect the mass to the cases of the DB 9 connectors as well. If the bridge is not inserted, the connector cases have no mass. In that case the mass is connected only to pin5 of the previously mentioned connectors.
3.7 X3 This termination bar enables you to connect/disconnect the power supply at certain circuit elements. The bridges are inserted at the factory when manufactured and are not to be turned off later on. 4.0 DIP – SWITCH SETTING Dip – switches are used to adjust certain multiplexer configurations. If the configurations are not properly adjusted, the manufacturer cannot guarantee proper operation of the multiplexer.
Figure 16: Presentation of DIP switches
![Page 205: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 14
Description of the individual switches:
DIP SWITCH DESCRIPTION 1 2 transmission speed PC-MUX x 0 115200 via COM port x 1 921600 via USB
3 4 5 transmission speed MUX-CLIENT
0 0 0 1200 1 0 0 2400 0 1 0 4800 1 1 0 9600 0 0 1 19200 1 0 1 38400 (only 12 channels)
6 ON_LINE system 0 normal 1 sas 7 not in use 8 loopback/normal 0 normal 1 loopback
Table 1: Description and significance of the individual switches
First dip-switch can be set to ON or to OFF. It is not importance.
![Page 206: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 15
5.0 SOFTWARE SETTING OF THE MULTIPLEXER In addition to the hardware setting (connection, dip-switch setting, etc.), the software setting of the multiplexer is very important as well. Certain files have to be installed and by adjusting the parameters in these files you will enable the multiplexer to operate properly. You need the file gmInfo.cfg for the multiplexer to operate. <gmInfo> <StationNumber>0<StationNumber> <gmAddress>1<gmAddress> <gmId>player1ufo9999<gmId> <gmChannel>1<gmChannel> <\gmInfo> Description of individual settings in the gmInfo.cfg setting file • <StationNumber>0-7<StationNumber> the number of an individual roulette gambling spot; we start counting with 0. • <gmAddress>1-8<gmAddress> SAS address; write the address for each gambling spot, beginning with 1. • <gmId>anythinggmId> at the moment you can write anything here • <gmChannel>0 or 1<gmChannel> in case the SAS interface between the MUX and the SAS servers does not support several addresses, the number of an address, supported by the SAS interface, should be inserted here. For the Novomatic interfaces enter 1. For other interfaces ask the manufacturer. As these interfaces are usually ajdusted to slot machines, it is usually number 1 that needs to be entered. If the interface enables the support of several addresses, enter 0. In case you are using the multiplexer in the SAS ON_LINE system, the setting file gmInfo.cfg has to be installed in the ONLINE_SAS folder. Setting the multiplexer in the configuration base Additional multiplexer settings are to be carried out by an authorised person; therefore, you should contact the Gold Club services for proper setting. You can get detailed information at: - E-mail: [email protected] - telephone: +386 57 311 562
![Page 207: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION MULTIPLEXER
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 16
Please be prepared to give the serial number of the roulette device and the version of the software that is being used.
![Page 208: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
PLAYER’S GUIDE
![Page 209: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENTS 1.0 GAMING MACHINE SHORT DESCRIPTION .................................................................. 3
2.0 PLAYER POSITION DESCRIPTION AND RULES OF THE GAME............................. 3
3.0 GAMING SHIFTS DESCRIPTION....................................................................................... 3 3.1 KEYBOARD ...................................................................................................................................... 3 3.2 DISPLAY DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................. 10
4.0 BETS COMBINATION AND SINGLE COMBINATION WINNINGS .......................... 12
![Page 210: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 GAMING MACHINE SHORT DESCRIPTION Automated American roulette is a gaming machine which does not require a croupier to perform a game. That means all basic processes needed for the game are automatically performed. Automatically preformed processes are:
- Wheel spinning - Ball blow out - Bets opening - Reading of the winning number - Bets closing - Wheel lifting or returning the ball to the start position - Wins summing
2.0 PLAYER POSITION DESCRIPTION AND RULES OF THE GAME In basis the gaming machine consists of at least one or more player positions. Gold Club’s roulettes enable up to ten players on one gaming machine. That means up to ten players can play on the same machine independently. As at every electronic machine the player has different instruments for the game:
- keyboard for the play - display - pay in and pay-out mechanisms
Instruments required for the game are described in the next chapter. 3.0 GAMING SHIFTS DESCRIPTION
3.1 KEYBOARD Besides the display the keyboard is an element used for the player to play the game. It is placed on each of the player positions. Keyboard demonstration can be seen in the figure below.
![Page 211: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
Figure 1: Gaming machine keyboard
As seen in the figure above the keyboard consists of many keys. The keys are used for placing the bets, erasing the bets, coin pay-outs, language selection, etc. The bets can be placed by the player manually or automatically. Placing the bets manually means the player places the bet on a selected field. Besides the manual way of placing the bets the player can also use the automatic one. Keys that enable the automatic bets placing are: • NEIGHBOURS • ZERO SPIEL • CLOSE TO ZERO • ORPHANS • SERIES 5/8 • FINALI SINGLE KEYBOARD KEYS DESCRIPTION
By clicking that key the tokens are placed to neighbouring fields of previously selected number. Example: if the bet is placed to a number 17 and the »NEIGHBOURS« key is pressed the machine automatically places the tokens to the neighbouring two fields -that are the fields 25 and 34. Example is shown in the figure 2.
Figure 2: Token’s setting at »NEIGHBOURS » function
![Page 212: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
By clicking that key the programme places the tokens to certain fields. A token setting is the same in any case and it does not change. Example is shown in the figure 3.
Figure 3: Token’s setting at »ZERO SPIEL« function
By clicking that key the programme sets the tokens to certain fields. Also here the setting is always the same. Example is shown in the figure 4.
Figure 4: Token’s setting at »CLOSE TO ZERO« function
By clicking that key the programme sets the tokens to a beforehand determined fields. Settings example is shown in the figure 5.
Figure 5: Token’s setting at »ORPHANS« function
![Page 213: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
By clicking that key the programme automatically sets the tokens to a beforehand determined fields. Settings example is shown in the figure 6.
Figure 6: Token’s setting at »SERIES 5/8« function
By clicking that key the programme automatically sets the tokens to a beforehand determined fields that is: if the first token is set to a number 1 and the »FINALI« key is pressed the machine sets the remaining tokens to fields 11, 21, 31.
Figure 7: Token’s setting at »FINALI« function
As seen in the figures above the programme sets the tokens to different fields when pressing the mentioned keys. Settings combinations may not seem logical. By reviewing the figure below these combinations may become clearer and more reasonable to the player.
![Page 214: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
Figure 8: Single series according to a setting of the numbers on the wheel
Using that key the number of tokens set to a certain field is selected. Selection can be made between: X1, X2, X4, X10, X100, X250, X500 and FULL.
By clicking that key the tokens already placed to a certain field are erased. The last set token is erased with one click; all tokens can be erased by double clicking that key.
Bets of the previously played game can be repeated by clicking that key; bets duplicating can be performed by double clicking the mentioned key.
By clicking that key the menu opens in which different functions can be selected such as: SERVICE, LANGUAGE, HELP, PAYOUT and LOCK. Menu can be closed by clicking the same key again.
![Page 215: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Figure 9: Menu description
SINGLE MENU PARTS DESCRIPTION SERVICE By clicking the »SERVICE« key the manager or croupier is warned if any kind of change happens to a gaming machine whether that is an error, eventual pay out, etc. LANGUAGE By clicking the »LANGUAGE« key the menu opens in which the language is selected. There are eight different languages to select from: - English - Czech - French - Croatian - Italian - Lithuanian (Lithuania) - Hungarian - Macedonian - German - Polish - Roman - Russian - Slovak (Slovakia) - Slovenian - Spanish
![Page 216: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
LOCK By clicking the »LOCK« key the player position can be locked. That can be done when there is enough credit and there are no tokens set on the playing board. To unlock the playing position the croupier needs to be contacted because it can only be done using a special key. PAYOUT By clicking that key the winning credits are paid out. To pay out the coins and tokens the »PAYOUT« key needs to be pressed first and the number of tokens to be paid out needs to be selected then. Pay out is possible if the gaming machine holds pay out devices (hoppers). HELP By clicking the »HELP« key the help window opens. EXTERNAL BUTTONS Our machine has one external button “BET button”. With this button players can put bets to different fields.
By clicking the BET key the bets on the last selected number are increased.
Sometimes our machines also have START button. With pressing this button the game will be faster.
By clicking the START key the game process gets faster.
![Page 217: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
3.2 DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
Display is placed inside the gaming machine and is used to display bets, winning numbers, money pay ins, winnings, etc. It can be divided into two parts: Upper part- it contains graphical image of the fields. Lower part- it contains other parameters.
The display’s upper part enables the player with graphical image of bets placing and winning numbers while the lower part displays time of bets opening, credits pay in number, credits pawn number, credits pay out number and the last eight winning numbers. OTHER GRAPHICAL ELEMENTS’ DESCRIPTION Time Bar
Time bar is a function used to show bets opening to bets closing time. Game is that way more interesting because the player knows at what time the bets will close.
![Page 218: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
Text Bar
Different text is displayed alternately in that window. Text shows the current state of the game. There are more different texts available:
Place your bets No more bets Double the bets? Bets are limited Not enough credit You win No win, try again Pay out Erase
Credit Bar
Current value of credits on a single player position is displayed in that window. Bet Bar
Number of credits bet is displayed in that window. Win Bar
Number of winning credits is displayed in that window.
![Page 219: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
LAST EIGHT WINNING NUMBERS REVIEW
Last eight winning numbers are shown in that part of the display. The last winning number is the one shown in the outmost left part. In our case that is the number 36. 4.0 BETS COMBINATION AND SINGLE COMBINATION WINNINGS There are different bets combinations for the player to select from. Winnings depend on those combinations. Winnings are shown below.
Bet is placed to a single number (STRAIGHT-UP). The winning is 35 to 1.
Bet is placed to two numbers (SPLIT). The winning is 17 to 1. Bet is placed to three numbers (TRIO). The winning is 11 to 1. Bet is placed to four numbers (CORNER). The winning is 8 to 1. Bet is placed to six numbers (LINE). The winning is 5 to 1.
![Page 220: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PLAYER’S GUIDE
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 13
Bet is placed to twelve numbers (DOZEN). The winning is 2 to 1.
Bet is placed to a column of twelve numbers. (COLUMN). The winning is 2 to 1.
Bet is placed to a lower number (LOW 1-18). The winning is 1 to 1. Bet is placed to a higher number (HIGH 19-36). The winning is 1 to 1. Bet is placed to an odd number (ODD). The winning is 1 to 1. Bet is placed to an even number (EVEN). The winning is 1 to 1. Bet is placed to a red number (RED). The winning is 1 to 1. Bet is placed to a black number (BLACK). The winning is 1 to 1.
![Page 221: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
POWER BOX
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 222: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 POWER BOX DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................. 3
2.0 POWER BOX FUNCTIONING ............................................................................................. 4 2.1 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MAIN BOARD AND POWER BOX ...................................... 5
3.0 POWER BOX COMPONENTS.............................................................................................. 6 3.1 POWER BOX CONNECTORS ........................................................................................................ 6
3.1.1 DISTRIBUTION BOX ................................................................................................................... 6 3.1.2 TRANSFORMER........................................................................................................................... 7 3.1.3 POWER .......................................................................................................................................... 7 3.1.4 RISING (DVI) MOTOR ................................................................................................................. 8 3.1.5 BLOW OUT MOTOR..................................................................................................................... 8 3.1.6 COM................................................................................................................................................ 9
3.2 POWER BOX DISPLAYS................................................................................................................. 9 3.2.1 LED PC........................................................................................................................................... 9 3.2.2 LED TRAFO .................................................................................................................................. 9 3.2.3 LED POWER ON........................................................................................................................... 9 3.2.4 LED VPIH ...................................................................................................................................... 9 3.2.5 LED DVIG...................................................................................................................................... 9
![Page 223: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 POWER BOX DESCRIPTION Power box circuit is used to perform certain commands. That commands are send by the main board. Basically the power box has the control over the blow out motor, rising motor and also some other parts of the electronic roulette. Once the command (impulse) is send from the main board the power box switches on the relay and the command is performed. The power box circuit is shown in the figure 1. It is basically composed of relays, transistors, safety fuses, etc.
Figure 1: Power box circuit
Power box is used to switch on the contactor in the distribution box. The roulette functions in a way that when the computer is started, all of the other electronic components are switched on in chain, automatically. The way of switching on is shown in the figure below.
![Page 224: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
Figure 2: Sequence of switching on the roulette’s main components
2.0 POWER BOX FUNCTIONING As mentioned above the power box gets commands (impulses) from the main board. The main board sends the command to the power box and the power box performs it. The main task of the power box is to switch on the contactor in the distribution box. Besides that the power box also switches on the rising motor and the blow out motor. All of the commands are sent to the power box through the POWER cable, which is connected to COM connector.
Figure 3: Power cable
![Page 225: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
2.1 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MAIN BOARD AND POWER BOX The whole communication runs through the power cable (figure 3). The communication runs in an impulse which means the main board is sending impulses of certain length to the power box. Using those same impulses the relays and transistors in the power box are being switched on and off. With those relays and transistors the power box is steering the blow out motor and the rising motor.
Figure 4: Principle of impulse communication between MB and PB
![Page 226: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
3.0 POWER BOX COMPONENTS Besides already mentioned components (relays, safety fuses, transistors, led diodes, etc.) the power box consists of many connectors used for the connection of certain roulette’s components. The blows out motor, the rising motor, the transformer are just some of the components connected to the power box. All the important power box components are shown in the figure below.
Figure 5: Demonstration of power box elements
3.1 POWER BOX CONNECTORS
3.1.1 DISTRIBUTION BOX
The distribution box is connected to that connector. Using that connector the power box switches on the contactor in the distribution box and it gets 230 V AC out of the distribution box. The distribution box is connected with two cables: box transformer cable and relay onset cable. Both of them are shown in the figure 6.
![Page 227: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
Figure 6: Connectors used to connect the PB and the distribution box
3.1.2 TRANSFORMER
Transformer is connected to that connector. It is connected using the transformer cable.
Figure 7: Transformer connection demonstration
3.1.3 POWER The computer switches on the power box using that connector. The power box is connected to the computer with the cable shown in the figure below.
![Page 228: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Figure 8: Cable used to switch on the power box
3.1.4 RISING (DVI) MOTOR The rising motor is connected to that connector.
Figure 9: Rising motor connection
3.1.5 BLOW OUT MOTOR
The blow out motor is connected to that connector.
Figure 10: Blow out motor connection demonstration
![Page 229: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
3.1.6 COM The main board and power box communication is performed using that connector. The communication runs through the power cable (figure 3).
3.2 POWER BOX DISPLAYS
3.2.1 LED PC That led diode is showing whether the computer is switching the power box on correctly or not. The diode lights when the power box receives 12 V out of the computer.
3.2.2 LED TRAFO That diode is showing the proper functioning of the transformer. In case the transformer is not functioning the diode is not switched on
3.2.3 LED POWER ON That diode is switched on once there is an ON command performed in the power terminal. T5 transistor is switched on and the T3 and T4 transistors get their energy supply.
3.2.4 LED VPIH That diode is showing the relay and blow out motor functioning. If the diode is switched on at the ball’s blow out, the blowing out functions properly.
3.2.5 LED DVIG That diode is showing the relay and rising motor functioning. If the diode is switched on once the plate is raised, the rising functions properly.
![Page 230: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
POWER BOX
( DIFFERENCES BETWEEN OLD and NEW )
![Page 231: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION POWER BOX VER.: 1.3
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN NEW AND OLD POWER BOX CIRCUIT
- first five pins PHOENIX (K3 before) connector is separated to one two (CON2
now) and one three pins (CON5 now) connector. Wire connection is kept. - connector (TRAFO before) is separated to two, two wires connectors (CON3 and
CON4). Also here the wire connection is the same as before. - relay (RELE 4) is changed with transistor M1. - relay (VPIH) is changed with transistor M2. For more visual details see pictures below. old power box new power box
![Page 232: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
PRIVILEDGE EDITOR
PROGRAM TOOL
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 233: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 SETTINGS................................................................................................................................ 3
3.0 USE ............................................................................................................................................ 4
![Page 234: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 DESCRIPTION Priviledge editor is a program tool used for smart key’s registration and for rights setup on the single smart key. Because different types of smart keys can be used (administrator, user) a certain type of the smart key has certain adequate rights- they can be set up by using the priviledge editor program tool. 2.0 SETTINGS You only need a setup file to set up the priviledge editor. There is an example shown on the pictures below.
select I agree to continue or cancel select the options you need and press next to stop
press install press close
![Page 235: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
The programme installs the selected files automatically. Also it creates a shortcut into: Start → Programs → Gold Club utils → Priviledge editor 3.0 USE It is quite simple to use the priviledge editor program tool. You only need to be aware of the rights that had been assigned to a single smart key. When initialising it first open the program tool (priviledge editor). The dialog box opens (picture 1) in which the ID code of a smart key and the password need to be written. You can get the smart key ID code by putting the smart key into a code reader. The password is goldclub.
Picture 1: Priviledge editor dialog box
When the correct password is written and the button enter is pressed the window opens (picture 3). Here you need to press the button Key mngmnt and a new window is opened (picture 2). The smart key characteristic need to be entered in this window.
![Page 236: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Picture 2: The setup window for initialising the smart key Single field definitions • dallas put in the key ID. Put the key into a lock and an ID writes out automatically. • key select the smart key’s progressive number (K1, K2, K3, …, etc.) • credit unused • bonus unused • date unused • description put in the key’s description When the entering is over press the button AddNew. The window opens (picture 3) in which you can select the privileges or the rights.
![Page 237: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Picture 3: Smart key’s rights setup Settings description: • user password the user has access to game’s current finances • admin password the user has access to game’s current finances , current bet/win and current statements of accounts (z) • supervisior password the user has access to current and global finances • financial the user has access to temporary finances • financial 2 the user has access to game’s current finances , current bet/win and current statements of accounts • financial all the user has access to current and global finances • key for switches it enables to reset the switches using the key • temp to null
![Page 238: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
it enables to reset the current finances (erase finances) • setup it enables to access the setup base (setup.mdb) using a key • reset error it enables to reset all errors in the STOP dialogue • restart roulette it enables to restart the roulette in the STOP dialogue • shutdown roulette it enables to shutdown the roulette in the STOP dialogue • hopper current tokens current number of tokens in the hopper • screens it enables to view all games in a certain player position • language it enables to change the language • pay in it enables to pay in with the key • pay out it enables to pay out with the key • fast financial it enables to view the game’s finances without shutting down the roulette • stop roulette it enables to stop the roulette • dropbox current tokens the current number of tokens in the drop box • read ball dialog it enables to access the read ball dialogue (button 2 to1) When the smart key setup is finished you always have to press save or else all of the settings will be unchanged. Beside the privileges or the rights you need to determine the player position to which the rights will refer to. Do that by pressing the button COM setup in the window in which you set the smart key rights. The setup window opens (picture 4).
![Page 239: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION PRIVILEDGE EDITOR PROGRAM TOOL
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Picture 4: Smart key’s location setup In the serial port window select the progressing number of the player position to which the certain rights of the smart key will refer to. Set the data transfer speed in the speed field - that is 9600 Kbit/s.
![Page 240: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ROOF SUPPLY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
ROOF SUPPLY
( DIFFERENCES BETWEEN OLD and NEW )
![Page 241: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION ROOF SUPPLY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN NEW AND OLD ROOF SUPPLY
- new roof supply is equipped with potentiometer for regulate luminosity for halogen light’s. - two different kind of transformer can be used (150VA-8V or 150VA-12V). Recommended transformer is 150VA-12V. - it support halogen light regulation over COM port directly from the central
PC.
old roof supply circuit new roof supply circuit
![Page 242: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
OPTICAL SENSOR
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 243: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 SENSOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................... 3
2.0 SENSOR CIRCUIT FUNCTIONING.................................................................................... 3 2.1 CROSSBARS PISITION DETERMINATION ............................................................................... 4 2.2 HOLES POSITION DETERMINATION ........................................................................................ 4 2.3 BALL’S POSITION DETERMINATION ....................................................................................... 5 2.4 USE OF ZERO CROSSBAR ............................................................................................................. 5
3.0 SENSOR SETUP...................................................................................................................... 5
5.0 SENSOR CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 7 5.1 COM.................................................................................................................................................... 7 5.2 TSL ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 5.3 IR ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 5.4 LED DISPLAYS................................................................................................................................. 8
5.4.1 LED HOLE..................................................................................................................................... 8 5.4.2 LED CROSSBAR ........................................................................................................................... 8 5.4.3 LED START ................................................................................................................................... 8
6.0 STATUS SENSOR SETUP AND CONNECTION ............................................................... 8
![Page 244: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 SENSOR CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Sensor circuit is a circuit used to read the ball’s position. It is placed inside the roulette under the wheel. In basis it consists of two parts, the primary and the secondary part. Sensor circuit is the primary part; the transmitter and the receiver of the UV light are in the secondary part. Sensor circuit is shown in the figure below.
Picture 1: Sensor circuit Primary part: In the primary part there are the sensor circuit with two accompanied receivers and transmitters. UV receiving diode is used as a receiver and UV transmitting diode is used as a transmitter. Using those diodes the sensor determines crossbars and zero’s position. Secondary part: In the secondary part there are the transmitting diode and the receiving transistor. Using these two elements the sensor determines the holes in the wheel and the ball’s position. 2.0 SENSOR CIRCUIT FUNCTIONING Sensor circuit is constantly sending information about the holes, crossbars and zero’s positions to the PC. PC can determine the ball’ position using the holes and crossbars signals. The zero’s signal is used to reset the sensor. That means the sensor controls the crossbar, the hole, the crossbar, the hole, etc. When the wheel turns once, the zero resets the preceding counting and the sensor starts to count all over again.
![Page 245: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.1 CROSSBARS PISITION DETERMINATION
The crossbars position is controlled using the receiving and the transmitting diode. Each crossbar is attached to the wheel with a screw. Basically the diodes are controlling these screws. To determine the crossbars position the diodes have to be in the same level. For each determined crossbar the sensor sends a signal to the PC.
Picture 2: Crossbar signal T period presents the duration of wheel’s one round.
2.2 HOLES POSITION DETERMINATION Sensor determines the holes position in a similar way that it does with the crossbars. The only difference is that here it uses TSL transistor instead of the receiving diode. Sensor sends the impulse for each hole.
Picture 3: Hole signal
![Page 246: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
2.3 BALL’S POSITION DETERMINATION PC determines the ball’s position using the crossbars and holes signals. The ball is found on the part of the wheel where the hole determining transistor does not send the impulse. PC determines the number that has fallen using the crossbars determination because basically it is counting the number of crossbars on the wheel. 2.4 USE OF ZERO CROSSBAR The zero is used to reset the holes and crossbars counting. Zero crossbar is a bit thicker in comparison to other crossbars. 3.0 SENSOR SETUP Because of the essential nature of the sensor to the roulette’s proper function the proper setup of it is required. That means the sensor circuit, the UV diode and the TSL transistor need to be connected properly. The sensor is connected to a special holder under the wheel. Its connection has to be correct- meaning that no crossbar should slide on or touch the sensor while the wheel is turning. UV diode and TSL transistor are used to determine the holes position. That means these two elements need to be in line. TSL transistor and UV diode are set properly if the voltage in the transistor comes between 800 and 1900 mV. Voltage can be checked with sensor tester that you can order from our circuits catalogue. If the setup is correct the sensor sends the signals as shown in the figure below.
![Page 247: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
Picture 4: Signals that are sent if the sensor is set properly 4.0 SENSOR AND PC COMMUNICATION As mentioned above the sensor is constantly sending certain parameters (signals) to the PC. These signals are transmitted to the main board, using the SENSOR cable. From the main board to the PC the signals are sent through the COM 2 cable using the controlling channels. PC receives the signals through the COM 2 communicational port.
Picture 5: SENSOR cable
![Page 248: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
5.0 SENSOR CONNECTORS DESCRIPTION The sensor consists of three connectors. These connectors are shown in the figure below.
Picture 6: Sensor circuit block scheme
5.1 COM The main communication between the sensor and the main board runs through that connector. The communication runs through the SENSOR cable. That cable is shown in the figure 5.
5.2 TSL The TSL transistor is connected to that connector. TSL transistor is used to determine the holes or the ball’s position.
Picture 7: TSL transistor cable
5.3 IR UV transmitting diode is connected to that connector. With the combination of UV diode and TSL transistor the holes or the ball’s positions can be determined. The diode is connected with the IR DIODA cable.
![Page 249: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
Picture 8: IR DIODA cable 5.4 LED DISPLAYS The LED indicators are used to control the sensor’s functioning. It enables the service staff to control the sensor’s functioning more precisely. Each sensor consists of at least three led diodes- for each parameter the sensor determines there is one diode available. LED indicators are also duplicated on the main board of the roulette.
5.4.1 LED HOLE That led diode is showing the proper functioning of the holes counting. LED indicator is switched on by every hole if the sensor functions properly. If the ball is in any hole, LED indicator doesn’t switch on.
5.4.2 LED CROSSBAR That led diode is showing the proper functioning of the crossbars counting. Led diode is switched on by every crossbar if the sensor functions properly.
5.4.3 LED START
That led diode is showing the proper zero function. Because the zero is thickened the led diode is switched on every time it determines a thick crossbar. 6.0 STATUS SENSOR SETUP AND CONNECTION Status sensor is a sensor used to determine the starting position of the ball. When the ball is in its starting position the status sensor sends an impulse to the PC which informs the PC that it can start with the game. Status sensor is basically a tube in which there are UV diode (IR diode) and TSL transistor. The proper functioning of the status sensor is determined by the LED status which is placed on the main board. It is connected to the main board with the STATUS cable. That cable is shown in the picture below.
![Page 250: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION OPTICAL SENSOR VER.: 1.5.2
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
Picture 9: STATUS cable
![Page 251: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SENSOR TEST ( program tool )
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
SENSOR TEST
program tool
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 252: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SENSOR TEST ( program tool )
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
1.0 SENSOR TEST PROGRAM TOOL DESCRIPTION Sensor test program tool is a tool used to check the sensor circuit functioning. The program tool’s start up file is set in the C://Ruleta directory under the name SensorTest.exe. Double clicking the icon opens the working window in which the sensor functioning can be reviewed.
Figure 1: sensor test program tool
As seen in the figure above the sensor test program tool is a very useful tool to check the sensor circuit’s proper functioning. Using that tool the entire malfunction at reading the ball, reading the crossbars, etc. can be discovered. Single parameters description: • LOOP TIME Wheel’s one round time (time the wheel needs to make one round) • TIME DIFF The difference between the current and the reference round time (the reference round time is the time the wheel needs to make the first round) • BALL IS ON NUMBER The number on which the ball has currently stopped (in case the ball has been moved to another number the current state needs to be erased or else the sensor will not perceive the change) • NUMBER That is the current number. • COUNTER The number of fields on the wheel (the number of different numbers, there are 37 different numbers on the wheel) • LOOP The number of the wheel’s rounds.
![Page 253: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SENSOR TEST ( program tool )
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.1 USAGE Sensor test program tool is used as a help to test the sensor circuit’s proper functioning. The preliminary condition of the proper functioning is an exit voltage on the TSL transistor that is high enough (between 800 and 1900 mV). Only after certain preliminary conditions needed for the proper functioning are assured, the sensor circuit’s functioning can be tested with the use of Sensor Test program tool. Sensor circuit’s proper functioning preliminary conditions: • TIME DIFF must not be higher than 10% of LOOP TIME • Each of the 37 numbers must be perceived by the program in the wheel’s one round (COUNTER) • The numbers must not repeat in the wheel’s one round (NUMBER) • The program must perceive the ball on every number (BALL IS ON NUMBER)
![Page 254: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SMS TRIAL SERVER
SMS TRIAL SERVER
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
![Page 255: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SMS TRIAL SERVER
CONTENT 1.0 SHORT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................... 3
2.0 TRIAL SERVER FUNCTIONING ........................................................................................ 3 2.1 SENT SMS FORMAT........................................................................................................................ 3 2.2 RECEIVED SMS FORMAT ............................................................................................................. 4 2.3 WHERE CAN I FOUND THE ROULETTE NAME AND THE CODE ....................................... 5
3.0 SENDING AND RECEIVING SMS ERRORS ..................................................................... 6
4.0 ERRORS IN RETURN MESSAGE ....................................................................................... 6
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
![Page 256: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SMS TRIAL SERVER
1.0 SHORT DESCRIPTION One of Gold Club’s last innovations is an automatic answering machine which is used for trial extension. It is mostly used to repair certain gaming machine’s errors. As you already know the practice till now has been that at each trial whether it was a switch or another one you had to contact the Gold Club customer support technical team. Especially at Saturdays, Sundays and holidays that kind of system very often could have been quite retardatory. By setting the server that kind of problems are automatically over because the server works undisturbedly 24 hours a day, all the year around.
SEND SMS TO +386 40-636-768
Figure 1: Demand sending principle
The answering machine supports solving only certain errors for now. Those errors are: 1 error 30 2 error 31 3 error 40
2.0 TRIAL SERVER FUNCTIONING Server functions on the base of received SMS (short message service). The procedure is the following: the user sends an SMS to the telephone number +386 40-636-768 and the server automatically returns the answer. The message’s format is defined in advance. As the demand the answer is also sent in a form of an SMS. As mentioned above the sent SMS has to be in a precisely defined form.
2.1 SENT SMS FORMAT
Sent SMS forms are defined in advance. In case the user doesn’t follow the prescribed formats the answering machine will not be able to send the right answer.
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
![Page 257: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SMS TRIAL SERVER
Sent SMS formats examples: Error 30: 30 <roulette name> <code> [<days>] [<offset hours>] Error 31: 31 <roulette name> <code> Error 40: 40<roulette name> <code> The example of SMS trial message is shown on the figure below.
extra time
30 UFO12345 00157182879203428569 30 8roulette name
20 digit codeerror
extension time
space
Figure 2: Explanation and example of send SMS message For saving error 30 you can send the SMS message without extension time and extra hours. In that case server automatically extends you the trial for 90 days. Maximum value for extending is 90 days.
2.2 RECEIVED SMS FORMAT
The received SMS has a very similar form as the sent SMS. The only difference is the 20 -figure code. Received SMS formats examples: Error 30: 30 <roulette name> <new code> Error 31: 31 <roulette name> <new code> Error 40: 40 <roulette name> <new code>
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
In the figure below is shown the example of received message.
![Page 258: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SMS TRIAL SERVER
30 UFO12345 99842817120896571430roulette name
new 20 digit codeerrorspace
Figure 3: Explanation and example of received message
The description of single SMS parts: -30, 31, 40 error type <roulette name> gaming machine’s name, example: UFOxxxx <code> 20-digit code written out when error appears. The code must been writing without interval. <days> extension time (in days). If you write xx days means, that the next trial will be shown after xx days. <offset_hours> extra time (in hours). If you write xx hours means, that the next trial will be shown after xx days and xx hours.
2.3 WHERE CAN I FOUND THE ROULETTE NAME AND THE CODE
In the chapter 2.1 is writing that we must in SMS message enter the roulette name and the code. This means that we enter the name and the code which is showing in the trial window. Example and explanation of trial window is shown on the figure below.
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
![Page 259: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION SMS TRIAL SERVER
ROULETTE NAME
xx
UFO 12345
20 DIGIT CODE
ERROR DESCRIPTION
FIELD FOR ENTERING NEW CODE
Figure 4: Error window explanation
3.0 SENDING AND RECEIVING SMS ERRORS Mistakes can be made at each SMS sending or receiving. To avoid making mistakes it is crucial to enter the parameters mentioned above in a proper way. Before sending an SMS you have to make sure the telephone number of the automatic answering machine you are sending an SMS to is the right one. Also make sure the SMS you are sending is written in the proper format. In case of any kind of trouble you can reach us at the telephone number +386 5-7311-562 or email: [email protected]. 4.0 ERRORS IN RETURN MESSAGE Our smart server also send you return message if you send us the wrong SMS format message. All possible return messages is writing below. - Unknown user or phone number. The person is not listed in the server base. Please contact our customer support. - Your trial cannot be extending. You don’t have permission to extend the trial. Please contact our customer support. - No such machine or invalid owner. The person hasn’t got such gaming machine. - Duplicate machine found. The person has several gaming machines with the same name. - Please check code number and/or roulette name! The 20-digit code is a wrong one or is not written properly.
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
If you have any problem about SMS server please contact us.
![Page 260: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
SETUP AND FUNCTIONING
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 261: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 JACKPOT SYSTEM CONNECTION................................................................................... 4
3.0 JACKPOT SYSTEM AND GAMING MACHINE COMMUNICATION......................... 5
4.1 GCJPCONFIG PROGRAM TOOL APPLICATION......................................................... 6 4.2 JACKPOT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ON THE ROULETTE ................................ 9 4.3 JACKPOT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ON EXTERNAL PC.................................... 9
5.0 JACKPOT SYSTEM LOG FILE DESCRIPTION............................................................. 11
5.1 LOG FILE INTERPRETATION ..................................................................................... 12
![Page 262: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 DESCRIPTION Jackpot system is a system in which a certain amount of money or credits is collected. That amount is getting bigger and bigger with every game and is also paid out to the player in case of a winning combination. The system functions in a way where at each game on the roulette or other gaming machine a certain amount of credits is transferred to the jackpot fund. The number of credits designed for the jackpot is shown on the external monitor, so every visitor of the salon is informed of the jackpot price. That number is also shown on every monitor (player position) placed in the roulette. That enables the player with the review about the jackpot fund state.
Figure 1: jackpot display
![Page 263: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.0 JACKPOT SYSTEM CONNECTION Jackpot system consists of two parts. The first part represents the gaming machine ( in our case that is Gold Club American roulette ) while the second part represents the external computer with the accompanied display ( plasma ) used to show the amount of the jackpot prize. In order to make the system function properly, the single parts need to be connected. The principle of the system’s structure and connection is shown in the figure below.
Figure 2: Jackpot system and gaming machine communication
The whole jackpot system structure is shown in the figure above. As seen in the figure both of the computers need to be connected to each other. Do that by using the jackpot communication cable. The structure of the cable is shown in the figure number 3.
Figure 3: Jackpot communication cable
![Page 264: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
3.0 JACKPOT SYSTEM AND GAMING MACHINE COMMUNICATION The communication between the systems runs through the jackpot communication cable (figure 3). The communication is a serial one and the RS232 communicational protocol is used. The gaming machine sends to the jackpot system the information about the number of credits designed for the jackpot fund. That information is sent at the end of every active game or when the bets are closed. Also at that time the player gets the refreshed number on his monitor. The example is shown in the figure below.
Figure 4: Data block example
The whole data block structure can be seen in the figure above. Single Bytes meanings: 1.Byte: hash »#« symbol, it represents the beginning of the block 2 and 3 Byte: represent the data block length- the first three symbols 4. Byte: the sender’s address 5.Byte: the type of message 6-X. Byte: useful information- the information about the credits designed for the jackpot prize. The information is in ASCII form. (x+1)-(x+2). Byte: CRC the previous bytes value. The communication between the systems is defined in the TransmiterComm.con and ReceiverComm.con files. TransmiterComm.con file is set in the computer inside the roulette in the Ruleta directory. ReceiverComm.con file is set in the jackpot system computer in the directory C:\\JACKPOT
![Page 265: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
TransmiterComm.con and ReceiverComm.con files description The right parameters used for the gaming machine and jackpot system communication are set in these two files. TransmiterComm.con parameters Three parameters need to be set: <ID><com_ port><speed> in which: ID…………...is an identification number (your choice) com_port……is a communication port mark speed………..is a data transfer speed, usually it is 9600Kbit/s Example: <1><COM12><9600> TransmiterComm.con file setup can be seen in the example above. Exactly the same is the ReceiverComm.con file setup. ReceiverComm.con parameters These parameters are exactly the same as the one in the TransmiterComm.con file. The only difference is that you have to enter the COM port of the jackpot system computer. 4.0 JACKPOT SYSTEM SETUP As any other system this one also needs proper settings to function correctly. First two files need to be created for the system: ProgresiveSetings.dat and JackPotGameSetings.dat. Both of them are created using the GCJPConfig program tool. 4.1 GCJPConfig PROGRAM TOOL APPLICATION
GCJPConfig program tool is used to setup some of the jackpot system’s parameters. Using that program tool two files, in which certain rules of the jackpot prize are determined, are created. GCJPConfig program tool is not set in the roulette. Usually you create ProgresiveSetings.dat and JackPotGameSetings.dat on another computer and just transfer these two files into roulette computer (c:\).
![Page 266: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
Figure 5: GC jackpot configurator
As seen in the figure above, the program tool consists of two parts: -ProgresiveSetings -JackPotGameSetings Certain parameters used only when calculating points into credits and the way of adding the credits into the jackpot fund are set in the first part (ProgresiveSetings). In the second part (JackpotGameSetings) the parameters used in the jackpot game are set. The winning combinations are defined here. The first part’s setting fields description: - Name The name of the file in which certain settings are saved. Default value is ProgresiveSetings. The name on principle should not be changed. - Progresive Type The way of adding the credits to the jackpot prize. There are two ways: - Simple constant progresive - Simple proportional progresive In case you choose the first way, a certain amount of credits (always the same amount) will be added to the jackpot fund at each game. If you select the second way the amount of credits
![Page 267: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
will also be added to the jackpot fund, only the amount will depend on the number of bets. In fact the amount added is only a certain percentage of the bets. In case none of the players is making any bets the jackpot prize is not getting any bigger. - Round Step [pct or points] The number of points (Simple constant progresive) or the percentage (Simple proportional progresive) of bets added to the jackpot fund at every game played on the roulette. In case you select proportional progressive in the ProgresiveType Simple, a certain percentage will be added to the jackpot fund at the end of each game. That percentage depends on the bets. Example: Bet 200 credits on the roulette and enter the value 20 in Round step. In case the ProgresiveType is in percentage the 20 % of 200 credits will be added to the jackpot fund. It also depends on the points to credits transformation. - Points for 1 credit The number of points equalled to one credit. It is used when transforming credits into points. - Low Bound[points] Minimum jackpot fund value in points. - Up Bound [points] Maximum jackpot fund value. The second part’s setting fields description: - Name The name of the file used to save certain jackpot game settings. Default value is JackPotGameSetings. The name on principle should not be changed. - Number of slots The length of the sequence that need to be hit for the jackpot prize. - Level of wins These levels are setup in a way where single levels and the jackpot percentage is entered into the field. The values are separated by semicolon. Example: 1;70 2;10 That setting means that on the first level (sequence of three winning numbers is hit) the player will win 70% of the whole jackpot fund, on the second level (sequence of two winning numbers is hit) the player will win 10% of the fund, etc The levels are added by entering the level first, then the percentage of the prize and then clicking ADD. The levels can be removed by selecting the certain level and clicking REMOVE.
![Page 268: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 9
- Winning combination All winning combinations review. These combinations can be entered manually or by using the GENERATE SYSTEM button. In case you do it manually the winning combinations need to be entered in the <Level of win>;<slot1>;<slot2>,… field. When all of the parameters are entered, click OK and the tool will automatically create both files (ProgresiveSetings and JackPotGameSetings).
4.2 JACKPOT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ON THE ROULETTE When the setting files have been set using the GCJPConfig program tool, these files need to be transmitted to the gaming machine. But before that some of the files need to be renamed and those are: ProgresiveSetings.dat file is renamed to ProgresivaConfig.dat file JackpotGameSetings.dat file is renamed to JPGConfiguration.dat file Now both of the files are ready to be transmitted to the gaming machine. Besides the files already mentioned, the TransmiterComm.con file needs to be transmitted too. All three files are set into the Ruleta directory of the gaming machine.
Figure 6: Files needed for the GCJPS proper functioning
Some of the parameters also need to be set in the setup base. Only authorised GC costumer support staff is competent to do that. All information regarding the settings in the setup database is available on the email: [email protected].
4.3 JACKPOT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ON EXTERNAL PC Beside the jackpot system setup on the roulette some of the parameters need to be set also on the external computer or the computer on which the jackpot display is connected. Create a new folder C:\JACKPOT. Once the folder is created the files needed in the jackpot are added in.
![Page 269: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 10
Figure 7: Files needed for the jackpot system to function
All of the files needed are shown in the figure above. Files explanation: - RES The folder which contains all of the jpg files used to display the jackpot fund - Jackpot.dat The file which contains the jackpot fund information - Looplong.mpg Jackpot display background. - ReceiverComm.con Jackpot system and gaming machine communication setup. The content of this file is the same to the one in TransmiterComm.con file. The example of the ReceiverComm.con file setup is described in the chapter 3. - Transparent.exe Jackpot fund display starting file. When all of the files are set the jackpot system can be started. Two files need to be started: - Looplong.mpg - Transparent.exe Once these two files are opened the next figure appears on the screen:
![Page 270: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 11
Figure 8: jackpot system display
5.0 JACKPOT SYSTEM LOG FILE DESCRIPTION
Jackpot system also has its LOG file in which all the information about the winnings is contained. In case the player wins the jackpot that is also saved in the LOG file. The LOG file is set in the Ruleta directory under the name JPG.log. The file setup is not needed because it is automatically created when the Ruleta.exe program tool is started
Figure 9: LOG file of the jackpot system
![Page 271: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION GC STAND ALONE JACKPOT SYSTEM
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 12
5.1 LOG FILE INTERPRETATION
As seen in the figure above all of the transaction data is saved in the LOG file. <17.6.2004 9:44:03 74598912> <TRN1 for gm0 created – 2 credits> means that the player on the player position no.1 (gm0) won 2 credits <17.6.2004 9:44:03 74598912> <CommitGMJackPotWin GM0 2 credits> means that the player on the playing position no.1 has been paid out with the won amount of the credits (2) TRN1, TRN2,…,etc.----------serial numbers of the transactions. In case the gaming machine gets started again the serial number of the first transaction is always TRN1 regardless of its state before the restart. gm0, gm1, gm2,…,etc.---------identification mark of the single player position. The first player position has the mark gm0, the second gm1, the third gm2, etc.
![Page 272: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
HOW TO SET THE TOUCHSCREENS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
GOLD CLUB CASINO
PRODUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF AMERICAN AUTOMATED ROULETTE
![Page 273: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
HOW TO SET THE TOUCHSCREENS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
HOW TO SET THE TOUCHSCREEN MONITORS CORRECTLY First you have to entry to BiOS\Diag\Touchscreen tool. If all the monitors are connected and detected you have to map them.
Press Map Touch Screen button and map all monitors. When the monitors are mapped you have to set the correct configuration. Go to Touch Settings and select drawing for all monitors.
![Page 274: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
HOW TO SET THE TOUCHSCREENS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
Than you have to calibrate all them in calibration menu. Calibration can be 2 or 4 point.
For confirm the calibration process and configuration settings is necessary to map all the screens again. In case that calibration is not ok try following: Select the monitor where calibration is not ok. Go to tools\options\advanced and select Enable Linearization.
Than close this window and in options select the enable linearization button. Here you have to make more detailed calibration with 25 points.
![Page 275: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
HOW TO SET THE TOUCHSCREENS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
The same calibration should be used if touchscreen glass or controller is changed. In case that monitor has some problems with moving cursor, please use following procedure for stabilize it. First select the monitor, than go to cursor and press Stabilize cursor button.
![Page 276: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
HOW TO SET THE TOUCHSCREENS
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
After scanning different frequencies program recommend one. Select this one and press Apply button.
“NOTE” Every time some changes are made is necessary to remap the monitors. If not changes will not be stored.
![Page 277: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
A.) 1.U
r
- .:-,:::'>--- -."'C'- -0.- -~<:'--O--""""'':_",~
EQO;? AJ..L wOOEI>.I SE.9Jtr~t.JT5 wirJf J11ET.ArL
Al.,)o \,.:)00 DE.-'I n EE. j..LR /l.S (IIJ lIfE 'f iP-$r?JA5 E. D~T }0A.C2..l2.OVJ6C-~l,;) Teo rY111C-1-f)
RJT A~ TQ.E.t...I-,Jf:~ojJ$. OJ.J 71TE ~ME.. ?!rQT
OF- ~ooD€hI Sfc,inEJ..ITS
5)30° ON THE, J;:AGI+ ':pA-;12.
'P\JT TttE. 10LD1::.~ Th1>1::: IN AWOSIT '7f2.DQVEON THE AlJ.. 7A I 'RS A}JD cur rT.
It: you H-AvEA 'Pi2.0'[?LEWJ WiTIt FIXI}J~
TItE GpJ.J)E..J.JTAP.E USE -SIL-ic.olJ 1l...V.E QU 7~STA.\Z..T,Ar";!) ENJ) OF n?E.
;:) 1Jf.~ ,4-- ..1;
f"-'.' ,
~) .1C!T ~VQ. 1>JLx,/<p-S
Se~"'l!J.lTS IN TI!E.
<1IUJOVE..-/////////1'/// ////'////
AND ~oi", iT f.\ji,1fv
~H &o/"EIJf'.s
JOtN A-u.. woo~e.;J '?AtL.,S ~ "pt'r-ik!.s
6.) i ~ LP'-,# _o' .
."'j.. ,
,1:
" ,:f/ ,/1
/ / / .../ ;' ;' /'
/:' L--/
F
8.) ~~~~
T-Spo..x 5")(2.0 m»1~~I/11\1W1
\, ~"I #fJ.L])E-~ Oi-ITilE.I, ~ rL.U j GfRS$ JUNc/il
r)rer.s 0/01 THE. ?L.Ex;' ~~J?ooslr/OJJ?J../~ 7O~"#E<: AuD.se,
~T waoDEj..1)r.j./D VO/~
![Page 278: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
WAVECOM SYSTEM
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 279: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 GSM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................................. 3
2.0 GSM MODEM SETUP............................................................................................................ 3 2.1 WAVECOM MODEM INITIATION .............................................................................................. 4
3.0 GSM SYSTEM AND PC COMMUNICATION.................................................................... 4
4.0 PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 5 4.1 SETUP WINDOW PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION..................................................................... 6 4.2 TYPES OF MESSAGES.................................................................................................................... 6
4.2.1 DAILY REPORTS............................................................................................................................ 6 4.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT REPORTS........................................................................................................... 7 4.2.3 ERRORS .......................................................................................................................................... 7
5.0 TIPS AND TRICKS ................................................................................................................. 8
![Page 280: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 GSM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GSM system is a system used to send information about the roulette’s state to its owner. The information is send using the wavecom modem in a form of an SMS. The roulette can send different type of information to its owner and that are:
- daily reports - pay in and pay out reports - possible errors reports
With the help of that system the roulette’s owner has a complete insight of the roulette’s state. In fact he or she can control the machine 24 hours a day every day in a year. The roulette has to be positioned in a place where there is a fairly strong GSM signal. The GSM modem is shown in the figure below.
Figure 1: GSM modem demonstration 2.0 GSM MODEM SETUP GSM system is placed inside the roulette. To function properly it needs a +12 V direct current. Physical setup is shown in the figure 1. Beside the physical connection the file MOBILE.exe needs to be set in the RULETA directory. That file can be copied from any mobile media (CD, floppy, USB flash disc, etc.)
![Page 281: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.1 WAVECOM MODEM INITIATION When modem is physically connected it also needs to be initiated. Use GC terminal emulator program tool to do that. Some of the parameters need to be check before the initiation: - make sure that the SIM card is registered with Voice, SMS, Data or Fax activated to be able to use the respective functions
- ensure the SIM card is not Security Locked, if it is locked, remove it with the mobile phone
- insert the SIM card with the card holder and power on. The light will starts to blink intermittently after few seconds. The modem is ready to be communicating.
When the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled open the GC terminal emulator program tool. First select the COM port on which the wavecom modem is connected. Set the data transfer speed to 9600 Kbit/s and press ALT+X so the green light is switched on. Initiate with the help of the AT commands:
- input AT+Z and press enter
- input AT+IPR=9600 and press enter
- input AT+CSAS and press enter
- input AT&W and press enter
In case the wavecom modem is not responding the data transfer speed needs to be changed to 9600 Kbit/s in the Hyper terminal.
3.0 GSM SYSTEM AND PC COMMUNICATION That communication is a serial one and it uses the RS 232 protocol. In fact it runs using the AT commands. PC is constantly checking out the parameters set by the roulette’s owner in the Mobile.exe window (figure 3). When certain conditions are fulfilled the wavecom modem sends an SMS. The SMS base is set in advance and it doesn’t change while some of the variables contained in a single SMS can change (daily finances review, pay in or pay out data, errors, etc.). For each SMS that has been sent the PC receives a confirmation from the wavecom modem. The communication runs through the GSM communicational cable shown in the figure below.
![Page 282: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Figure 2: GSM communicational cable 4.0 PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION When you double click the icon Mobile.exe the setup window opens. In that window you can select all of the wavecom modem settings. When you select the certain parameters you confirm your selection by pressing the button »OK«. The setup window is shown in the figure 3.
Figure 3: wavecom modem setup window
![Page 283: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
4.1 SETUP WINDOW PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION • SMSC SMSC is the telephone number of your SMS centre: - info: your GSM operator - number must be entered with international prefix - e.g.: Mobitel Slovenia users: 0038641001333 • NUMBERS GSM numbers on which you want to receive roulette data: - numbers must be entered with international prefix - e.g.: Mobitel Slovenia user: 0038641344108 - when you use less than four numbers, enter your amount of numbers and leave the other spaces empty • LOCATION Name of the location where your roulette machine is. It is sent as the first part of the SMS message that you receive. • SETTINGS Select between the type of information that WAVECOM modem will send to our mobile phone.
4.2 TYPES OF MESSAGES
Gold Club automated American roulette machine can send tree types of SMS messages: 1. - daily reports 2. - input/output reports 3. - error reports You can set the system to send various combinations of these reports for each GSM number inputted.
4.2.1 DAILY REPORTS System sends you data once a day. Check SEND DA. next to GSM number that you want to receive daily reports to. The system will only send you date and hour of sending, when all additional settings are off, to let you know that machine is still running.
![Page 284: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS: • send h. - You can set the time for sending in SEND H. window (08 means sending time from 8:00am till 9:30 most) - If the system is switched off at this time, message will be sent immediately after switching the system on. • show f. - when this option is checked system will also send you financial report (input, output and result) • gl.o d. - the system sends you temporary (daily, monthly,..) financial report by default, but with this option checked financial report will contain global financial data. • spec. f. - if you use more than one input key, system sends you data for each key separately. • sum f. When this option is checked you will also receive summation of all keys - total roulette input, output and result.
4.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT REPORTS • c. limit When this option is checked, system will send you SMS message every time when input or output will be higher then the value in the C.LIMIT is set. This option is also used with SHOW F., GLO. D. and SUM. F. settings • send f. - you must check this option, if you want receive data about finances. • send da. - if you want daily receive any data, check this window. • send n. - if you want to receive data every time when the electronic counters is set to null, check this window. • send s. - if you want to receive data every time when the roulette is stopped, check this window • log. f. - if you set this option, you can see all sent messages in log file.
4.2.3 ERRORS • send e. - if you want to receive data when any error is happened, check this window. When this option is checked, system will send you errors that can happen in roulette machine. This option is also used with SHOW F., GLO. D. and SUM. F. settings
![Page 285: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.7
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
5.0 TIPS AND TRICKS Typical use settings: Owner of the roulette sets GLO. D., SEND DA., SUM F. and SHOW F. to know major financial data. Serviceman is only interested in technical details, so he checks SEND E. and SEND DA without SHOW F. – he will not receive any financial data Casino manager is interested in all high inputs and outputs and in differences between two or three teams working in his casino, so he sets SEND F. without GLO.D. (he is more interested in short term results). He may also set SEND E. to quickly organize his technical team. When you want to receive global and temporary financial data at the same time you can input your GSM number twice and you will receive two SMS messages, one for TEMP and the other for GLO. D.
![Page 286: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
WAVECOM SYSTEM
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 287: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT 1.0 GSM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................................. 3
2.0 GSM MODEM SETUP............................................................................................................ 3 2.1 WAVECOM MODEM INITIATION .............................................................................................. 4
3.0 GSM SYSTEM AND PC COMMUNICATION.................................................................... 4
4.0 PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 5 4.1 SETUP WINDOW PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION..................................................................... 6 4.2 TYPES OF MESSAGES.................................................................................................................... 6
4.2.1 DAILY REPORTS............................................................................................................................ 6 4.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT REPORTS........................................................................................................... 7 4.2.3 ERRORS .......................................................................................................................................... 8
5.0 TIPS AND TRICKS ................................................................................................................. 8
![Page 288: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 GSM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION GSM system is a system used to send information about the roulette’s state to its owner. The information is send using the wavecom modem in a form of an SMS. The roulette can send different type of information to its owner and that are:
- daily reports - pay in and pay out reports - possible errors reports
With the help of that system the roulette’s owner has a complete insight of the roulette’s state. In fact he or she can control the machine 24 hours a day every day in a year. The roulette has to be positioned in a place where there is a fairly strong GSM signal. The GSM modem is shown in the figure below.
Figure 1: GSM modem demonstration 2.0 GSM MODEM SETUP GSM system is placed inside the roulette. To function properly it needs a +12 V direct current. Physical setup is shown in the figure 1. Beside the physical connection the file MOBILE.exe needs to be set in the RULETA directory. That file can be copied from any mobile media (CD, floppy, USB flash disc, etc.)
![Page 289: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.1 WAVECOM MODEM INITIATION When modem is physically connected it also needs to be initiated. Use GC terminal emulator program tool to do that. Some of the parameters need to be check before the initiation: - make sure that the SIM card is registered with Voice, SMS, Data or Fax activated to be able to use the respective functions
- ensure the SIM card is not Security Locked, if it is locked, remove it with the mobile phone
- insert the SIM card with the card holder and power on. The light will starts to blink intermittently after few seconds. The modem is ready to be communicating.
When the conditions mentioned above are fulfilled open the GC terminal emulator program tool. First select the COM port on which the wavecom modem is connected. Set the data transfer speed to 9600 Kbit/s and press ALT+X so the green light is switched on. Initiate with the help of the AT commands:
- input AT+Z and press enter
- input AT+IPR=9600 and press enter
- input AT+CSAS and press enter
- input AT&W and press enter
In case the wavecom modem is not responding the data transfer speed needs to be changed to 9600 Kbit/s in the Hyper terminal.
3.0 GSM SYSTEM AND PC COMMUNICATION That communication is a serial one and it uses the RS 232 protocol. In fact it runs using the AT commands. PC is constantly checking out the parameters set by the roulette’s owner in the Mobile.exe window (figure 3). When certain conditions are fulfilled the wavecom modem sends an SMS. The SMS base is set in advance and it doesn’t change while some of the variables contained in a single SMS can change (daily finances review, pay in or pay out data, errors, etc.). For each SMS that has been sent the PC receives a confirmation from the wavecom modem. The communication runs through the GSM communicational cable shown in the figure below.
![Page 290: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
Figure 2: GSM communicational cable 4.0 PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION When you double click the icon Mobile.exe the setup window opens. In that window you can select all of the wavecom modem settings. When you select the certain parameters you confirm your selection by pressing the button »OK«. The setup window is shown in the figure 3.
Figure 3: wavecom modem setup window
![Page 291: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
4.1 SETUP WINDOW PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION • SMSC SMSC is the telephone number of your SMS centre: - info: your GSM operator - number must be entered with international prefix - e.g.: Mobitel Slovenia users: 0038641001333 • NUMBERS GSM numbers on which you want to receive roulette data: - numbers must be entered with international prefix - e.g.: Mobitel Slovenia user: 0038641344108 - when you use less than six numbers, enter your amount of numbers and leave the other spaces empty • LOCATION Name of the location where your roulette machine is. It is sent as the first part of the SMS message that you receive. • SETTINGS Select between the type of information that WAVECOM modem will send to our mobile phone.
4.2 TYPES OF MESSAGES
Gold Club automated American roulette machine can send tree types of SMS messages: 1. - daily reports 2. - input/output reports 3. - error reports You can set the system to send various combinations of these reports for each GSM number inputted.
4.2.1 DAILY REPORTS System sends you data once a day. Check SEND DA. next to GSM number that you want to receive daily reports to. The system will only send you date and hour of sending, when all additional settings are off, to let you know that machine is still running.
![Page 292: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 7
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS: • send h. - You can set the time for sending in SEND H. window (08 means sending time from 8:00am till 9:30 most) - If the system is switched off at this time, message will be sent immediately after switching the system on. • show f. - when this option is checked system will also send you financial report (input, output and result) • gl.o d. - the system sends you temporary (daily, monthly,..) financial report by default, but with this option checked financial report will contain global financial data. • spec. f. - if you use more than one input key, system sends you data for each key separately. • sum f. When this option is checked you will also receive summation of all keys - total roulette input, output and result.
4.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT REPORTS • c. limit When this option is checked, system will send you SMS message every time when input or output will be higher then the value in the C.LIMIT is set. This option is also used with SHOW F., GLO. D. and SUM. F. settings • send f. - you must check this option, if you want receive data about finances. • send da. - if you want daily receive any data, check this window. • send n. - if you want to receive data every time when the electronic counters is set to null, check this window. • send s. - if you want to receive data every time when the roulette is stopped, check this window • send sw. - if you want to receive data about security switches, check this window. • log. f. - if you set this option, you can see all sent messages in log file.
![Page 293: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WAVECOM SYSTEM VER.: 2.0.0.8
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 8
4.2.3 ERRORS • send e. - if you want to receive data when any error is happened, check this window. When this option is checked, system will send you errors that can happen in roulette machine. This option is also used with SHOW F., GLO. D. and SUM. F. settings 5.0 TIPS AND TRICKS Typical use settings: Owner of the roulette sets GLO. D., SEND DA., SUM F. and SHOW F. to know major financial data. Serviceman is only interested in technical details, so he checks SEND E. and SEND DA without SHOW F. – he will not receive any financial data Casino manager is interested in all high inputs and outputs and in differences between two or three teams working in his casino, so he sets SEND F. without GLO.D. (he is more interested in short term results). He may also set SEND E. to quickly organize his technical team. When you want to receive global and temporary financial data at the same time you can input your GSM number twice and you will receive two SMS messages, one for TEMP and the other for GLO. D.
![Page 294: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WIBU KEY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 1
WIBU KEY
( TECHNICAL MANUAL )
![Page 295: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WIBU KEY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 2
CONTENT
1.0 DESCRIPTION AND USE OF THE WIBU KEY ................................................................ 3
2.0 THE MEANINING OF INDIVIDUAL SETUP VALUES ................................................... 4 2.1 ERROR DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................... 5
3.0 INSTALLATION OF THE WIBU KEY................................................................................ 6 3.1 INSTALATION OF WIBU KEY TO AN OLD ROULETTE......................................................... 6 3.2 SOFTWARE UPGRADE ON THE ROULETTE ........................................................................... 6
![Page 296: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WIBU KEY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 3
1.0 DESCRIPTION AND USE OF THE WIBU KEY Wibu key is adapter with 25 female and 25 male pins. It is connected on LPT 1 PC port. Wibu key allow us to protect different products in our PC and we can also control the number of licence of different programs. The example of Wibu key is shown on the picture below.
Picture 1: Wibu key
The most important thing of that key is that every key has its own ID number. ID number of the key is written on it’s back side. The number is different for every key. The advantage of the Wibu key is that program tolls are not dependent of the gamming machine. Another advantage is that we can use all of our program tolls on several gamming machines. Only requirement is that all the keys are programmed in the same number. The number of the Wibu key is written in the control panel.
Picture 2: Wibu key icon in control panel
![Page 297: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WIBU KEY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 4
2.0 THE MEANINING OF INDIVIDUAL SETUP VALUES
Picture 3: Setup of the Wibu key in control panel
Description of the left part of the window In the left window is under the LPT written the ID of the WIBU key. The ID is written on the every key. If the client has lost the ID number, he can check it on the control panel. Description of the right part of the window In the right part of the window there are two numbers written in the first two rows. The number in the first row is the ID number of the program tool. The other number is the ID of the licence. These two numbers have two parts: The left part of the number (2997) is the code of the producer, but the right part of the number (250 and 255) is the code of the program or of the licence. If the program tool is run with the code that is not written in the WIBU key, the roulette can not be run. You receive the error message with the code of the program tool or the licence. That number can be compared with the programmed number of the WIBU key. If the numbers do not matches the gamming
![Page 298: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WIBU KEY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 5
machine does not work. If there is any mistake of the WIBU key or the mistake in switching on the gamming machine you need to inform the producer about that ID key.
2.1 ERROR DESCRIPTION At the picture below is shown a mistake which can be reported at not correct use of the WIBU key. There the WIBU key does not contains the correct ID number of the program tools.
Picture 4: Error example
![Page 299: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
ROULETTE TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION WIBU KEY
GOLD CLUB CASINO ♣ Kraska cesta 4 ♣ 6210 Sezana ♣ Slovenia ♣ Europe Tel.: +386 5-7311-562 ♣ fax: +386 5-7311-561
www.gold-club.si ♣ e-mail: [email protected] 6
3.0 INSTALLATION OF THE WIBU KEY The WIBU key is factory installed. The installation cannot be changed later. In the case that WIBU key is not installed (old gamming machine, etc.), it need to be installed later. All the installation data are on the web site: http://www.gold-club.si/support.asp
3.1 INSTALATION OF WIBU KEY TO AN OLD ROULETTE
First you have to install software for WIBU key in PC. You run one of these two files: WkRt-int.exe or WkRt-US.exe. This is the same program in both cases, only difference is in language interface; first one is international, the second is US. During the installation you don’t have to make any changes, just push the »next« button till you arrive in the end of installation. The second thing you have to do is copy file Licenca.dll to folder C:\Ruleta. Then you shut down the PC, and install your WIBU key on the LPT 1 port in the backside of your computer and turn it on.
3.2 SOFTWARE UPGRADE ON THE ROULETTE First step to upgrade software on your roulette with new version, is to run and install Ruleta Compatibility which have to be the same version as your new version of software you want to install. For example: you have now v.1146 and you want to upgrade with v.1148. First you have to install Ruleta1148Compatibility. When instalation is complete just copy and overwrite the old Ruleta.exe with new one in the folder C:\Ruleta on your PC. You can download Ruleta Compatibility on the web site: http://www.gold-club.si/support.asp. For additional information contact Gold Club customer support tel.: +386 5 7311 562, or E-mail:[email protected]
![Page 300: Gold Club Casino Manual](https://reader034.vdocuments.net/reader034/viewer/2022042422/55cf98e5550346d0339a4e3e/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)